JP7096594B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As an example of a gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine is known to be capable of being set to any one of a plurality of set values having different jackpot determination probabilities, as described in, for example, Patent Document 1 below. These set values are set by a game control means capable of controlling the game.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-199931

By the way, when the setting value is changed, the setting is changed based on the fact that the power is turned on and a predetermined transition signal (setting key cylinder switch signal, RAM clear switch signal) is input to the game control means. You need to switch to mode. Here, it is generally considered that the game control means inputs a transition signal at the same time as the timing of turning on the power. However, in this case, the fraudster can easily grasp the input timing of the transition signal. For example, at the timing of turning on the power, the game control means is made to input the same signal as the transition signal, and the setting change mode is illegal. There is a risk of fraudulent activity such as shifting to.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a gaming machine capable of making it difficult to cheat.

The gaming machine of the present invention
A game control means that can set a set value corresponding to the jackpot judgment probability,
In a gaming machine equipped with an operable operating means
The game control means is
A transition signal can be input based on the operation to the operating means.
Based on turning on the power and inputting the transition signal, it is possible to shift to the setting mode related to the set value .
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the transition signal can be input at a timing determined by a lottery .
Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is
A game control means that can set a set value corresponding to the jackpot judgment probability,
A storage means that can store information related to the game,
A RAM clear operation means capable of erasing information related to a game stored in the storage means based on the operation, and a RAM clear operation means.
Equipped with a transition operation means that can be operated from a predetermined initial position to a movement position,
The game control means is
A RAM clear signal can be input based on the operation to the RAM clear operation means.
It is possible to input a transition operation signal based on the fact that the transition operation means is operated to the movement position.
It is possible to shift to the setting change mode based on the power-on, the input of the RAM clear signal , and the input of the transition operation signal.
When the RAM clear operation means is operated at the time of turning on the power and the transition operation means is operated at the movement position, the RAM clear signal and the transition operation signal are input at the same timing, and the above. The gaming machine is characterized in that there are times when the RAM clear signal and the transition operation signal are input at different timings .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraudulent acts.

It is a perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the gaming machine frame provided in the gaming machine. It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board provided in the gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of the part A shown in FIG. 4, and is the figure which shows the display which is included in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game control board side of the game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the staging control board side of the gaming machine. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of the gaming machine which concerns on a comparative example. In the comparative example, it is an electric circuit diagram for demonstrating the electric power supplied between a power supply unit, a payout control board, and a game control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the time of the in-circuit inspection of the comparative example. In this embodiment, it is an electric circuit diagram for demonstrating the electric power supplied between a power supply unit, a payout control board, and a game control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the time of the in-circuit inspection of this embodiment. It is a hit type judgment table. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "1", (B) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "2", and (C) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "3". It is a jackpot determination table to be used, (D) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "4", (E) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "5", and (F) is a setting. It is a jackpot determination table used when the value is "6". (A) is a reach determination table, (B) is a normal symbol hit detection table, and (C) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an opening pattern determination table of the electric chew. (A) is a perspective view showing a game control board and a game control board case, and (B) is a front view showing a game control board and a game control board case. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the game control board and the game control board case. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 20B, and FIG. 20B is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 20B. It is a front view which shows the game control board and the game control board case. It is a front view which shows the 7-segment display. It is a table showing the types of operations that can be performed when the power is turned on. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the effect mode when the setting confirmation operation is performed through the setting change mode transition operation to the RAM clear switch operation. It is a figure which shows the electric circuit around the microcomputer for game control. (A) is a diagram showing an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the rotation position, and (B) is a diagram showing an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the middle of operation from the rotation position to the standby position. , (C) is a diagram showing an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the standby position. It is a rear view of the inner frame. (A) is a diagram showing a case where an error display is executed on the 7-segment display, and (B) is an operation suggestion image on the display screen, an error sound output from the speaker, and a frame lamp and a board lamp. It is a figure which shows the error light emission mode of. It is a figure for demonstrating that the display mode is switched at a specific time time after the initial display is executed on a 7-segment display. It is a figure for demonstrating the case where the 1st pre-base, the 2nd pre-base and the 3rd pre-base are not yet memorized. It is a figure which shows 9 kinds of staging symbols (from the 1st staging symbol to the 9th staging symbol). (A) is a staging symbol lottery table used when the set value is "1", (B) is a staging symbol lottery table used when the set value is "2", and (C) is a staging symbol lottery table used when the set value is "3". It is a staging symbol lottery table used at times, (D) is a staging symbol lottery table used when the set value is "4", and (E) is a staging symbol lottery table used when the set value is "5". (F) is a staging symbol lottery table used when the set value is “6”. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol setting suggestion effect which is executed when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the loss mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the high setting suggestion effect performed at the time of SP reach loss. (A) is a table for explaining the input timing of the transition signal, and (B) is an input timing pattern determination table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing. It is a flowchart of a transition signal input process. It is a flowchart of setting change mode processing. It is a flowchart of setting value confirmation mode processing. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of power failure recovery. It is a flowchart of error mode processing. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process on the main side. It is a flowchart of base arithmetic processing. It is a flowchart of a base display process. It is a flowchart of a base display process. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a figure which shows the background image when various effect modes are set. (A) is a diagram for explaining a normal opening effect, and (B) is a diagram for explaining a special opening effect. It is a figure for demonstrating a normal customer waiting effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the special customer waiting production. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of a receive interrupt process. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a mode status setting process. It is a flowchart of the setting mode end setting process. It is a flowchart of a variation effect start process. It is a flowchart of a staging symbol selection process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of an opening effect selection process. It is a flowchart of a customer waiting effect selection process. It is a special customer waiting production pattern judgment table. It is a figure for demonstrating the special sound effect effect in 2nd form. In the second form, it is a special sound effect effect determination table. In the modified example, it is a figure for demonstrating the change of the effect mode when the setting confirmation operation is performed through the setting change mode transition operation and the RAM clear switch operation. It is a figure for demonstrating that the display mode of a set value changes by a setting confirmation operation in a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating that a set value and a base are displayed at the same time on a 7-segment display in a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating that there is a 1st display means for displaying a set value and a 2nd display means for displaying a base in a modification. In the modified example, it is an electric circuit diagram for demonstrating the electric power supplied between a power supply unit, a payout control board, and a game control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the time of the in-circuit inspection of the electric circuit shown in FIG. 74. In the modified example, it is an electric circuit diagram for demonstrating the electric power supplied between a power supply unit, a payout control board, and a game control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the time of the in-circuit inspection of the electric circuit shown in FIG. 76. In the modified example, (A) is a diagram showing an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the standby position, and (B) is an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the middle of operation from the standby position to the rotation position. It is a figure which shows, and (C) is the figure which shows the electric circuit when a setting key cylinder is in a rotation position.

1. 1. Structure of Game Machine The pachinko game machine PY1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description, the left-right direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described so as to coincide with the left-right direction for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Further, the front direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is described as a direction approaching the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and the rear direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is described as a direction away from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. do.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine frame 2 constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and includes an outer frame 22, an inner frame 21, and a front door 23 (front frame). The outer frame 22 is a vertically rectangular frame body that forms an outer shell portion of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The inner frame 21 is arranged inside the outer frame 22 and is a vertically rectangular frame body to which the game board 1 described later is attached. The front door 23 is arranged on the front side of the outer frame 22 and the inner frame 21, and has a vertical rectangular shape that protects the game board 1. The front door 23 is a portion facing the player and is decorated in various ways.

The gaming machine frame 2 is configured to include a hinge portion 24 on the left end side. The hinge portion 24 allows the front door 23 to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 22 and the inner frame 21, and the inner frame 21 to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 22 and the front door 23, respectively. It has become. An opening 23a is formed in the center of the front door 23, and a transparent transparent plate 23t is attached to the opening 23a so that the player can visually recognize the game area 6 described later. The transparent plate 23t is a glass plate in this embodiment, but may be a transparent synthetic resin plate. That is, the transparent plate 23t may be such that the game area 6 can be visually recognized from the front.

In the gaming machine frame 2, if the outer frame 22 is regarded as corresponding to the "base frame portion", the inner frame 21 and the front door 23 can be regarded as corresponding to the "front frame portion". Further, in the gaming machine frame 2, if the outer frame 22 and the inner frame 21 are regarded as corresponding to the "base frame portion", the front door 23 can be regarded as corresponding to the "front frame portion".

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the front door 23 has a handle 72k (game ball driving means) for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to a rotation angle, and a ball hitting dish for storing the game ball (a ball hitting dish). An upper plate) 34 and a surplus ball tray (lower plate) 35 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 34 are provided. Further, the front door 23 is provided with an effect button (input unit) 40k and a select button 42k that can be operated by the player during an effect that is executed as the game progresses. The select button (cross key) 42k is composed of an up direction button, a down direction button, a left direction button, and a right direction button. Further, the front door 23 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 212 and a speaker for outputting sound (not shown in FIG. 1).

The gaming board 1 shown in FIG. 4 is attached to the gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 1 is formed with a game area 6 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the handle 72k flows down is surrounded by a rail member 62. Further, the game board 1 is provided with a large number of decorative board lamps 54. Further, in the game area 6, a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The game board 1 is integrated with a plate-shaped member arranged on the front side and a back unit (various control boards described later, an image display device 50, a unit for attaching a harness, etc.) arranged on the rear side. It is a thing.

Further, an image display device 50 (effect display means, image display means), which is a liquid crystal display device, is provided near the center of the game area 6. The image display device may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device. The display screen 50a (display unit) of the image display device 50 has an effect symbol display area for variable display of the effect symbol EZ (decorative symbol) synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. .. The effect of displaying the effect symbol EZ is called the effect symbol change effect. The staging pattern variation effect may be referred to as "decorative pattern variation effect" or simply "variation effect". The effect symbol display area is composed of, for example, three effect symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol EZ1 is displayed in the left effect symbol display area, the middle effect symbol EZ2 is displayed in the middle effect symbol display area, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is displayed in the right effect symbol display area.

Each of the staging symbols EZ is composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The image display device 50 is a first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 81a and the second special symbol display 81b, which will be described later, by combining the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3. And the result of the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the result of the big hit lottery) is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

For example, if a big hit is won, the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed with doublets such as "777". In addition, if it is out of alignment, the staging symbol EZ is stopped and displayed with a random eye such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. That is, the player generally does not grasp the result of the big hit lottery by the first special figure display 81a or the second special figure display 81b, but by the image display device 50. The position of the effect symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbol EZ, for example, there is a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction.

The image display device 50 displays a display screen such as a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game, a demo effect for waiting for customers (customer waiting effect), and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect using the effect symbol EZ as described above. Display on 50a. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol EZ such as numbers, an effect image other than the effect symbol EZ such as a background image and a character image is also displayed.

Further, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 has a hold icon display area for displaying the hold icon HA (effect hold image) according to the number of stored first special figure hold and second special figure hold, which will be described later. By displaying the hold icon HA, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold display 83a described later and the second special figure displayed on the second special figure hold display 83b described later. The number of stored figures can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A center frame 61 (inner side wall portion) is arranged near the center of the game area 6 and in front of the image display device 50. At the lower part of the center frame 61, stages 61s are formed which can guide the game ball rolling on the upper surface to the first starting port 11 described later. Further, a warp 61w is provided on the left side of the center frame 61 to allow the game ball to flow in from the entrance and to flow out the game ball from the exit to the stage 61s. Further, a movable board 55k that can move up and down is provided on the upper part of the center frame 61. The board movable body 55k can be moved from the origin position above the display screen 50a to the effect position overlapping the center of the display screen 50a in the front-rear direction.

Below the image display device 50 in the game area 6, a first start winning device 11D provided with a first start port 11 (ball entry port) at which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change is provided. The first starting port 11 is also referred to as a first ball entry port, a fixed ball entry port, a first starting winning opening, and a first starting area. Further, the first start winning device 11D is also referred to as a first ball winning means, a fixed ball winning means, and a first starting winning device. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (big hit lottery, that is, determination of acquisition of a big hit random number or the like).

Further, below the first starting port 11 in the game area 6, a normal variable winning device (ordinary electric accessory so-called electric chew) 12D provided with a second starting port 12 (ball entry port) is provided. The second starting opening 12 is also referred to as a second entry opening, a variable entry opening, a second starting winning opening, and a second starting area. The electric chew 12D is also referred to as a second ball entry means, a variable ball entry means, and a second start winning device. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery).

The electric chew 12D includes an electric chew opening / closing member 12k (ball entry opening / closing member) that takes an open state and a closed state, and opens / closes the second starting port 12 by the operation of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k. The electric chew opening / closing member 12k is driven by the electric chew solenoid 12s described later. When the electric chew opening / closing member 12k is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12, and when the electric chew opening / closing member 12k is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 12. Become. That is, the second starting port 12 is a starting port in which the ease of entering the game ball can be changed. In addition, if the electric chew makes it easier to enter the ball into the second starting port when the electric chew opening / closing member is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, the electric chew is the first when it is in the closed state. 2 It does not have to be impossible to enter the ball into the starting port.

Further, on the right side of the first starting port 11 in the game area 6, a large winning device (special electric accessory) 14D provided with the large winning opening 14 is provided. The large winning opening 14 is also referred to as a special winning opening (special winning section). The large winning device 14D is also referred to as an attacker (AT), a special winning means, or a special variable winning device. The large winning device 14D includes an AT opening / closing member 14k (special winning opening opening / closing member) that takes an open state (first state) and a closed state (second state), and the large winning opening 14 is operated by the operation of the AT opening / closing member 14k. It opens and closes. The AT opening / closing member 14k is driven by the AT solenoid 14s described later. The large winning opening 14 allows a game ball to enter only when the AT opening / closing member 14k is in the open state.

Further, on the right side of the center frame 61, a gate 13 through which a game ball can pass is provided. The gate 13 is also referred to as a passage port or a passage area. The passage of the game ball to the gate 13 is an opportunity to execute a normal symbol lottery (that is, acquisition and determination of a normal symbol random number (hit random number)) for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 12D. Further, a plurality of general winning openings 10 are provided in the lower part of the game area 6. Further, at the lowermost portion of the game area 6, an out port 19 is provided to discharge a game ball that has been driven into the game area 6 but has not won a prize in any of the winning openings to the outside of the game area 6.

In the game area 6 in which various winning openings and the like are arranged, the left game area 6L (first game area) on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and the right game area 6R (second game area) on the right side are arranged. There is. The method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6L is called left-handed hitting. On the other hand, a method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6R is called right-handed hitting. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing left-handed is called the first flow path R1, and the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing right-handed is called the first flow path R1. , The second flow path R2.

A first starting port 11, a general winning port 10, an electric chew 12D, and an out port 19 are provided on the first flow path R1. By driving the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10. Since the gate is not arranged on the first flow path R1, the electric chew 12D is not opened when left-handed.

On the other hand, on the second flow path R2, a gate 13, a general winning opening 10, a large winning device 14D, an electric chew 12D, and an out opening 19 are provided. By hitting the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2, the player can aim to pass through the gate 13 and win a prize in the general winning opening 10, the second starting opening 12, and the large winning opening 14. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, display devices 8 are arranged at the lower right of the game board 1. As shown in FIG. 5, the indicators 8 include a first special symbol display 81a that variably displays the first special symbol, a second special symbol display 81b that variably displays the second special symbol, and a normal symbol. A normal map display 82 for variably displaying (normal map) is included. The first special symbol is also referred to as a first special figure or special figure 1, and the second special symbol is also referred to as a second special figure or special figure 2. In addition, ordinary patterns are also called ordinary patterns.

Further, in the display group 8, the operation hold of the first special figure hold display 83a and the second special figure display 81b for displaying the number of stored operations of the first special figure display 81a (first special figure hold) is displayed. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 83b that displays the number of stored items (second special figure hold), and a normal figure hold indicator 84 that displays the number of stored items of the operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal figure display 82. It has been.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol (special symbol). Further, the first special figure display 81a and the second special figure display 81b may be collectively referred to as a special figure display 81. Further, the first special figure hold indicator 83a and the second special figure hold indicator 83b may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold indicator 83. In addition, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold.

In the special symbol display 81, a special symbol (identification symbol) is variably displayed (variable display) and then stopped and displayed, so that a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 (special symbol lottery, The result of the jackpot lottery) will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (special symbol of a specific stop mode, that is, a jackpot symbol), the opening pattern is set according to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped and displayed (that is, the type of the winning jackpot). A big hit game (an example of a special game) that opens the big winning opening 14 is performed. The opening pattern of the big winning opening in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, the special figure display 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the jackpot lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. be. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left 1, 2, The jackpot symbol with the 5th and 6th LEDs lit is displayed. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost pattern. The lost symbol is not a specific special symbol. Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, each LED is lit so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. This is the aspect. It should be noted that the variable display mode may be any mode such that all the LEDs blink at the same time unless each LED is stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode).

In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, if there is a winning (winning) of a game ball in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the value of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number acquired for the winning (numerical information). , The determination information) is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105, which will be described later. Specifically, if a prize is won in the first starting port 11, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 105a, which will be described later, as a first special figure hold, and if a prize is won in the second starting port 12, the second special figure is held. As a figure hold, it is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 105b described later. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 105, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4", respectively.

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 105 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. The digestion of the special figure hold means that the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold is determined, and the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. Even if a prize is won during the middle or special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

The number of such special figure hold is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 83. Specifically, each of the special figure hold display 83 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 13. The normal symbol display 82 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 13 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), the second start opening 12 is opened with an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Auxiliary games are played. The opening pattern of the second starting port 12 will be described later.

Specifically, the normal symbol display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs (see FIG. 5), and displays a normal symbol according to the result of a normal symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a hit, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. It should be noted that the normal loss symbol is not a specific normal symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, that both LEDs are turned on alternately. It should be noted that the variable display mode may be any mode such that all the LEDs blink at the same time unless each LED is stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode).

In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 106 described later as a normal figure hold. It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 106, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4".

The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 106 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine a normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine PY1, if the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 13 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage up to a predetermined number.

Then, the number of such a normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 84. Specifically, the normal figure hold display 84 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of normal figure hold.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a game control board 100 (main control board) that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and an effect executed as the game progresses. It is provided with an effect control board 120 (sub control board) for controlling the game ball, a payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of the game ball, and the like. The game control board 100 constitutes a main control unit together with the payout control board 170, and the staging control board 120 constitutes a sub control unit together with the image control board 140 and the sub drive board 162 described later.

The sub control unit is provided with at least an effect control board 120, and can control a game effect using an effect means (image display device 50, speaker 620, panel lamp 54, panel movable body 55k, frame lamp 212, etc.). Just do it.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is provided with a power supply unit 190. The power supply unit 190 (power supply unit) inputs an AC24V power supply from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and uses various voltages (DC5V, DC12V, DC18V, DC24V) required for the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 based on the AC24V power supply. , DC37V) to generate electric power (power supply). The DC5V power is mainly used as a power source for various integrated circuits (ICs). Further, the electric power of DC12V is mainly used as a power source for various sensors and solenoids. Further, the electric power of DC18V is mainly used as a power source for various LEDs. Further, the electric power of DC24V and the electric power of DC37V are mainly used as a power source for the motor (driving means) for staging.

The power supply unit 190 (power supply unit) first supplies the generated power to the payout control board 170. Then, the generated electric power is supplied to the game control board 100 and the staging control board 120 via the payout control board 170. Further, the generated electric power is supplied to other devices via the payout control board 170, the game control board 100, and the staging control board 120. In this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 is not provided with a backup power supply circuit. This point will be described in detail later.

A power switch 195 (power switching unit) is connected to the power supply unit 190. The power switch 195 can be switched to an on state (ON state) in which power can be supplied based on the power supply of AC24V supplied from the outside, or a cutoff state (OFF state) in which power cannot be supplied. That is, the power switch 195 switches the power on or off by the ON operation or the OFF operation. When the power switch 195 is turned ON, the power switch 195 is turned on, and when the power switch 195 is turned OFF, the power switch 195 is turned on. It becomes a cutoff state. When the power switch 195 is in the ON state, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is in the power-on state, and when the power switch 195 is in the OFF state, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is in the power-off state.

Further, the power supply unit 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 191 (RAM clear operation means) that can be pressed. The RAM clear switch 191 is a game information related to a game stored in a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 of a game control microcomputer 101 described later (for example, game state information such as a high probability state, special figure hold or jackpot). Information such as the result of the hit / fail judgment) is to be deleted. As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM clear switch 191 is on the power supply unit 190 arranged on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (specifically, the power supply switch 195 in the power supply unit 190 when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is viewed from the back side. It is provided on the right side of). Therefore, the RAM clear switch 191 cannot be operated unless the employee of the game hall or the like is able to open the game machine frame 2. That is, it can be said that the RAM clear switch 191 is an operation means that cannot be operated by a player. The RAM clear switch 191 is a tact switch, and when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101. The state in which the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed is referred to as an ON state of the RAM clear switch 191, and the state in which the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed is referred to as an OFF state of the RAM clear switch 191. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on the power supply unit 190, but the arrangement location of the RAM clear switch 191 can be changed as appropriate, and is provided, for example, on the game control board 100 or a dedicated board. Is also good.

As shown in FIG. 6, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 101 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program is mounted on the game control board 100. The game control microcomputer 101 (main control means, game control means) includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM 104 used as a work memory, and the like. It includes a game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in the game ROM 103, and a game I / O (Input / Output) port unit 118 for inputting / outputting data and signals. The gaming RAM 104 (storage means) includes the above-mentioned special figure holding storage unit 105 (first special figure holding storage unit 105a and second special figure holding storage unit 105b), the normal figure holding storage unit 106, and other settings described later. A value information storage unit 107 and a base information storage unit 108 are provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the game control board 100 is provided with a 7-segment display 300 and a setting key cylinder 180 (shift operation means). The 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 6, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via the relay board 110. Therefore, a signal is input to the game control board 100 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the game control board 100 to each solenoid. Specifically, as the sensors, the first starting port sensor 11a, the second starting port sensor 12a, the gate sensor 13a, the large winning opening sensor 14a, the general winning opening sensor 10a, and the discharging port sensor 18a are connected.

The first start port sensor 11a is provided in the first start port 11 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a is provided in the second starting port 12 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a is provided in the gate 13 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The large winning opening sensor 14a is provided in the large winning opening 14 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 14. The general winning opening sensor 10a is provided in the general winning opening 10 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 10.

The discharge port sensor 18a is provided in a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and detects the game ball that has passed through the discharge port. The discharge port is provided at the lower end of the inner frame 21, and the game ball driven into the game area 6 has a first start port 11, a second start port 12, a large winning port 14, a general winning port 10, and an out. After entering any of the mouths 19, the ball finally passes through the discharge port. Therefore, by detecting the game ball that has passed through the discharge port with the discharge port sensor 18a, it is possible to detect all the game balls that have been driven into the game area 6. The number of all the game balls driven into the game area 6 can be referred to as the total number of fired balls. Further, since the total number of launched balls is the same as the number of all the gaming balls discharged outside the pachinko gaming machine PY1, it can also be called the number of discharged balls, the total number of discharged balls, or the number of out balls.

Further, as solenoids, an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s are connected. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening / closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening / closing member 14k of the prize-winning device 14D.

Further, the game control board 100 includes a special figure display 81 (first special figure display 81a and a second special figure display 81b), a normal figure display 82, and a special figure hold display 83 (first special figure hold display). The device 83a, the second special figure holding display 83b), and the general drawing holding display 84 are connected. That is, the display control of these indicators 8 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands and signals to the payout control board 170, and also receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device 73. In addition to being connected, the launch device 72 is connected via the launch control circuit 175. The launcher 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 (first control board) mounts a payout control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) 171 that can execute a control process related to payout of a game ball according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 171 (payout control means) includes a payout ROM 173 that stores a program for controlling payout, a payout RAM 174 that is used as a work memory, and a payout ROM 173 that executes a program stored in the payout ROM 173. A CPU 172 and a payout I / O port unit (input / output circuit) 178 for inputting / outputting data and signals are included. The payout ROM 173 may be externally attached.

The payout control board 170 drives the prize ball motor 73 m of the prize ball payout device 73 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the card unit CU connected to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 to drive the prize ball. Pay out or pay out ball rental. For example, when the game ball enters (wins) the first start port 11, the detection signal by the first start port sensor 11a is input to the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a prize ball signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting port 11 to the payout control board 170. In this case, the payout control microcomputer 171 that has received the prize ball signal drives the launch solenoid 72s via the launch control circuit 175 based on the prize ball number information stored in the payout ROM 173 to start the first operation. Prize balls (for example, 3 pieces) are paid out based on the entry into the mouth 11. At this time, the game balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 73a for counting, and the detection signal by the prize ball sensor 73a is output to the payout control board 170. Here, in this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit 179 is provided on the payout control board 170. This point will be described in detail later.

When the player operates the handle 72k (see FIG. 1) of the launching device 72, the touch switch 72a detects contact with the handle 72k, and the firing volume 72b detects the amount of rotation of the handle 72k. Then, the launch solenoid 72s is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 72b. In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, one gaming ball is launched in about 0.6 seconds.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the effect control board 120. The connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the game control board 100 and the staging control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 7, the staging control board 120 is mounted with a staging control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “staging control microcomputer”) 121 that controls the staging of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The staging control microcomputer 121 executes a program stored in the staging ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the staging as the game progresses, the staging RAM 124 that is used as the work memory, and the staging ROM 123. A staging CPU 122 and a staging I / O port unit 138 for inputting / outputting data and signals are included. The effect RAM 124 is provided with a setting value flag 125, which will be described later. The production ROM 123 may be externally attached. As described above, the effect control board 120 is adapted to be supplied with electric power (for example, electric power of 5 V DC) from the power supply unit 190 via the payout control board 170.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the image control board 140 is connected to the staging control board 120, and the sub drive board 162 (sub drive circuit) is connected to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 (effect control means) of the effect control board 120 causes the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to control the display of the image display device 50 based on the command received from the game control board 100. The effect control microcomputer 121 transmits a control signal via the image input circuit 147 of the image control board 140. Then, the image CPU 141 transmits a control signal to the image display device 50 via the image output circuit 148 of the image control board 140.

The image RAM 143 of the image control board 140 is a memory for expanding image data. The image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 50, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including decorative patterns) and a background. Image data such as images are stored. The image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads image data from the image ROM 142 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 121. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

A speaker 620 (sound output means) is connected to the image control board 140. The effect control microcomputer 121 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 620 via the voice CPU 149 of the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100. The voice CPU 149 controls the voice of the speaker 620 via the voice control circuit 150 based on a command from the image CPU 141. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 620 is stored in the staging ROM 123 of the staging control board 120. However, the acoustic data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Although the image control board 140 is made to perform voice control of the speaker 620, a voice control board may be provided separately from the image control board 140, and the voice control board may be made to perform voice control of the speaker 620. In this case, the voice control board may be connected to the effect control board 120, or may be connected to the effect control board 120 via the image control board 140. Further, the CPU may be mounted on the voice control board, and in that case, the CPU may be made to execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 via the sub drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100. .. In detail, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and emits light from each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. The data stored in the staging ROM 123 of the staging control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the drive of the board movable body 55k via the sub drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100. In detail, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data (also referred to as drive data) that determines the operation mode of the panel movable body 55k, and drives the motor to drive the panel movable body 55k according to the operation pattern data. I do. The data stored in the staging ROM 123 of the staging control board 120 is used to create the operation pattern data.

A CPU may be mounted on the sub-drive board 162, and in that case, the CPU may be used to control the lighting of the lamp and the drive control of the movable panel 55k. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the sub drive board 162, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, an input unit detection sensor (effect button detection sensor) 40a and a select button detection sensor 42a are connected to the effect control board 120. The input unit detection sensor 40a detects that the input unit 40k (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the input unit 40k is pressed, a detection signal is output from the input unit detection sensor 40a to the effect control board 120. The select button detection sensor 42a detects that the select button 42k (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the select button 42k is pressed, a detection signal is output from the select button detection sensor 42a to the effect control board 120.

Note that FIGS. 6 and 7 are functional block diagrams for explaining the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and not only the substrates shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 are provided. Except for the game control board 100, any plurality of boards shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 may be configured as one board, or one board shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 may be configured as a plurality of boards. good.

3. 3. Power supply unit Next, the power supply unit 190 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 shows the power supply unit 190 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 9 shows the power supply board 190X of the comparative example. Hereinafter, the power supply unit 190 and the power supply board 190X will be compared and described.

The power supply board 190X is generally used as a power supply unit in a pachinko gaming machine. When the power supply board 190X is used as the power supply unit, the power supply board 190X becomes the test target board. Therefore, it is not permitted to mount surface mount components on the power supply board 190X, and there is a situation that lead components (Dip components) with lead wires must be mounted. Further, most of the power supply boards 190X are provided with a backup power supply circuit, and the backup power supply circuit can supply backup power to the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 at the time of power failure. However, the power supply board 190X provided with the backup power supply circuit peculiar to the pachinko gaming machine becomes a custom-made product. From the above, there is a problem that the power supply board 190X cannot replace the lead component with a surface mount component, and by providing a backup power supply circuit, it has to have a relatively large configuration as a custom-made product. rice field.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 is used instead of the power supply board 190X. The power supply unit 190 is modularized and is a general-purpose product. Therefore, when the power supply unit 190 is used as the power supply unit, the power supply unit 190 is not a test target substrate. Therefore, not only the lead component but also the surface mount component can be mounted on the power supply unit 190. As a result, the power supply unit 190 can be made smaller (compact) by replacing the conventional lead component with a surface mount component. Further, since the power supply unit 190 is a general-purpose product, it does not have a backup power supply circuit peculiar to pachinko gaming machines. This makes it possible to make the power supply unit 190 even smaller.

Thus, as can be seen from the comparison between the power supply unit 190 shown in FIG. 8 and the power supply board 190X shown in FIG. 9, the power supply unit 190 can be configured to be smaller than the power supply board 190X. In the case of the power supply board 190X, it is necessary to mount lead parts that have become difficult to obtain in recent years, but in the case of the power supply unit 190, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to mount lead parts that are difficult to obtain.

Next, the arrangement of the power supply unit 190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, the power supply unit 190 is arranged on the lower rear side of the inner frame 21. A payout control board 170 is arranged behind the power supply unit 190, and at least a part of the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 overlap each other in the front-rear direction. The power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are arranged outside the transparent outer cover 25 provided at the rear of the game board 1. Therefore, the payout control board 170 can be said to be a "frame-side board" provided on the game machine frame 2 (inner frame 21) instead of the game board 1. The payout control board 170 is housed in a payout control board case 170A that does not interfere with the visibility of the payout control microcomputer 171.

On the other hand, the game control board 100, the above-mentioned effect control board 120, the sub drive board 162, and the image control board 140 are arranged inside the outer cover 25 of the game board 1. Therefore, the game control board 100, the effect control board 120, the sub drive board 162, and the image control board 140 can be said to be "board-side boards" provided on the game board 1 instead of the game machine frame 2. The game control board (main board) 100 is housed in a game control board case (main board case) 100A that does not interfere with the visibility of the game control microcomputer 101. The game control board 100 and the game control board case 100A constitute a game control board unit (main control board unit) 100B. The game control board unit 100B will be described later.

In this way, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are arranged outside the game board 1 and at a short distance behind the inner frame 21. In particular, since the payout control board 170 is arranged so that a part of the payout control board 170 overlaps the power supply unit 190 in the front-rear direction, the wiring is easily connected. Therefore, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by a harness HN3 (see FIG. 12) described later. As a result, the DC5V electric power generated by the power supply unit 190 is first supplied from the power supply unit 190 to the payout control board 170.

Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the power supply unit 190 is arranged immediately in front of the payout control board 170 so that most of the power supply unit 190 is not exposed. That is, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is viewed from the back side, the power supply unit 190 is hidden behind (front) the payout control board 170 and is almost invisible. Therefore, for the power supply unit 190, it is difficult to connect the wiring to the other control boards except for the payout control board 170 which is arranged immediately behind.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 and the game control board 100 are not directly connected by a harness, but the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN4 (see FIG. 12) described later. As a result, the electric power of DC5V generated by the power supply unit 190 is supplied from the power supply unit 190 to the payout control board 170, and then supplied from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100. In this way, it is possible to supply DC5V power to the game control board 100 while simplifying the wiring.

In short, conventionally, a method of branching the DC5V power generated by the power supply unit 190 (power supply board 190X) into a payout control board 170 and a game control board 100 is common. However, in this method, as shown in FIG. 8, when the power supply unit 190 is arranged so as to be hidden in front of the payout control board 170, it is difficult to connect the power supply unit 190 and the game control board 100. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to simplify the wiring, the game control board 100, which is a board-side board, is connected to the power supply unit 190 via the payout control board 170, which is a frame-side board. As a result, the electric power of DC5V generated by the power supply unit 190 is once supplied to the game control board 100 via the payout control board 170, and a new electric power supply relationship is established.

Here, the merits of the case where the power supply unit 190 can be configured small will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, the power supply unit 190 is arranged on the lower rear side of the inner frame 21. The power supply unit 190 shown in FIG. 8 can be made shorter in the vertical direction than the power supply board 190X shown in FIG. 9 by making it compact. As a result, the power supply unit 190 having a short vertical length can be arranged on the lower side of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

By the way, the front of the power supply unit 190 is a lower portion of the front door 23. The lower portion of the front door 23 is an operation mechanism unit 210 (see FIG. 1) including a ball hitting plate 34 (upper plate), a lower plate 35, an input unit 40k (effect button), a select button 42k, and the like. Therefore, as described above, when the power supply unit 190 having a short vertical length is arranged on the lower side of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the vertical length of the operation mechanism unit 210 is shortened and the operation mechanism unit is shortened. The upper end position of 210 can be lowered. As a result, it is possible to expand the game board 1 (see FIG. 4) downward and lower the lower end position of the game area 6. As a result, there is an advantage that the game entertainment can be improved by expanding the game area 6.

4. Electric circuit between the power supply unit, the payout control board, and the game control board Next, the electric circuit DK1 (see FIG. 12) between the power supply unit 190, the payout control board 170, and the game control board 100 of this embodiment will be described. .. However, before explaining the electric circuit DK1 of this embodiment, the electric circuit DKX between the power supply unit 190, the payout control board 170, and the game control board 100 of the comparative example will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the comparative example, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by the harness HN1. The connector CN1 at one end of the harness HN1 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and the connector CN2 at the other end of the harness HN1 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN1 is provided with a wiring h1 for supplying electric power of DC5V (specific voltage) from the power supply unit 190 (hereinafter, also referred to as a “normal power supply”) and a wiring h2 serving as a ground wire. In addition to the wiring h1 and the wiring h2, the harness HN1 is provided with, for example, wiring for supplying DC12V power from the power supply unit 190, but the description thereof will be omitted.

In the payout control board 170, there is a power line a1 (specific power line) between the connector CN2 and the branch portion j1. The power line a1 is connected to the wiring h1 of the harness HN1 via the connector CN2. Further, in the payout control board 170, there is a power line a2 connected to the ground G. The power line a2 is connected to the wiring h2 of the harness HN1 via the connector CN2.

A filter (noise reduction means) NF1 is connected to the connector CN2 side of the power line a1. The filter NF1 is composed of two coils (inductors) and one capacitor, and is a so-called three-element type low-pass filter. In the filter NF1, the two coils are connected in series with the power line a1. Further, one coil is connected in parallel to the power line a1. That is, one side of the capacitor is connected to the power line a1 and the other side of the capacitor is connected to the ground G. This filter NF1 removes high frequency noise from the power of DC5V supplied by the power line a1.

Further, the capacitor CA1 is connected in parallel to the branch portion j1 side of the power line a1 with respect to the filter NF1. This capacitor CA1 is an electrolytic capacitor having a relatively large capacitance (for example, a capacitance of 470 μF). The electrolytic capacitor is a capacitor in which the metal oxidized by the electrolytic solution is used as an anode, the film formed on the surface of the metal is used as a dielectric, and the electrolytic solution is used as a cathode. This capacitor CA1 prevents the voltage of DC5V from dropping when the fluctuation (load) of the current in the normal power supply becomes large.

Further, the capacitor CA2 is connected in parallel to the branch portion j1 side of the power line a1 with respect to the capacitor CA1. The capacitor CA2 is a ceramic capacitor having a smaller capacitance than the capacitor CA1 (for example, the capacitance is 0.1 μF). The ceramic capacitor is a capacitor made of ceramic (metal oxide sintered body) as a dielectric. This capacitor CA2 removes high frequency noise from a normal power supply on the power line a1.

There is a power line c1 (first branch power line) from the branch portion j1 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line c1 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power supply (power of DC5V from the power supply unit 190) is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring h1, the power line a1, and the power line c1. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can operate based on the normal power supply at the normal time.

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN2. The connector CN3 at one end of the harness HN2 is connected to the payout control board 170, and the connector CN4 at the other end of the harness HN2 is connected to the game control board 100. The harness HN2 is provided with a wiring h3 for supplying normal power and a wiring h4 for supplying backup power, which will be described later. In addition to the wiring h3 and the wiring h4, the harness HN2 is provided with, for example, wiring for supplying DC12V power from the power supply unit 190, but the description thereof will be omitted.

The payout control board 170 has a power line b1 from the branch portion j1 to the wiring h3 of the harness HN2, and the resistor T1 is connected in series to the branch portion j1 side of the power line b1. The resistance T1 suppresses the current from the branch portion j1 to the resistance T1. Further, a diode DO1 is connected to the connector CN3 side of the power line b1 with respect to the resistance T1. The diode DO1 allows a current flow from the diode DO1 toward the connector CN3 side, while restricting a current flow from the diode DO1 toward the branch portion j1 side. With this diode DO1, it is possible to prevent the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) described later from going from the diode DO1 to the branch portion j1.

Further, a capacitor CA3 is connected in parallel to the connector CN3 side of the power line b1 with respect to the diode DO1. The capacitor CA3 is an electric double layer capacitor having a rated voltage of 5.5V and having a capacitance much larger than that of the capacitors CA1 and CA2 (for example, the capacitance is 0.33F). The electric double layer capacitor is a capacitor whose operating principle is an electric double layer generated at the interface between activated carbon and an electrolytic solution. This capacitor CA3 releases the stored charge when the normal power supply from the power supply unit 190 is not supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control board 170 at the time of power failure. As a result, it is possible to supply DC5V power (hereinafter, also referred to as “backup power supply”) to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 described later and the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 described later.

Further, the capacitor CA4 is connected in parallel to the connector CN3 side of the power line b1 with respect to the capacitor CA3. This capacitor CA4 is a ceramic capacitor similar to the above-mentioned capacitor CA2. With this capacitor CA4, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the backup power supply supplied by the power line b1.

Further, there is a branch portion j2 on the connector CN3 side of the power line b1 with respect to the capacitor CA4. Then, there is a power line b2 from the branch portion j2 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line b2 is connected to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the backup power supply is supplied to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line b1 and the power line b2 by discharging the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 at the time of power failure. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can operate based on the backup power source even when the power is cut off. That is, it is possible to prevent the information related to the payout stored in the payout RAM 174 from being erased.

Further, the power line b1 is connected to the wiring h3 via the connector CN3. The wiring h3 is connected to the power line d1 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN4. The power line d1 is connected to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the backup power supply is supplied to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the power line b1, the wiring h3, and the power line d1 by discharging the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 at the time of power failure. .. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can operate based on the backup power source even when the power is cut off. That is, it is possible to prevent the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 from being erased. The power line b1, the wiring h3, and the power line d1 correspond to the "second branch power line".

Further, the payout control board 170 has a power line c2 extending from the branch portion j1, and the power line c2 is connected to the wiring h4 via the connector CN3. The wiring h4 is connected to the power line d2 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN4. The power line d2 is connected to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the electric power of DC5V from the power supply unit 190 is supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the wiring h1, the electric power line a1, the electric power line c2, the wiring h4, and the electric power line d2. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can operate based on the normal power supply (power of DC5V from the power supply unit 190) at the normal time.

As described above, according to the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example, as shown in FIG. 10, in the payout control board 170, the normal power can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 by the power line c1 extending from the branch portion j1. be. Further, the power line b1 extending from the branch portion j1 can supply a normal power supply to the capacitor CA3 and store an electric charge in the capacitor CA3. When the power is cut off, the backup power supply can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 by the power line b1 and the power line b2 extending from the branch portion j1. In this way, by using the branch of the power line c1 and the power line b1 and the power line b2, it is possible to supply the normal power supply and the backup power supply to the payout control microcomputer 171 with a simple circuit configuration.

Further, according to the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example, the capacitor CA3 provided on the payout control board 170 supplies the backup power supply to the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line b1 and the power line b2 at the time of power failure. In addition to being possible, it can be supplied to the game control microcomputer 101 of the game control board 100 via the power line b1, the wiring h3, and the power line d1. That is, the backup power can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101 without providing a capacitor as a backup power supply means on the power supply board. Therefore, the power supply unit 190 (see FIG. 8) can be used instead of the power supply board 190X (see FIG. 9), and a new backup power supply relationship can be constructed.

By the way, the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example has the following problems. First, in various control boards (electronic circuit boards) including the payout control board 170, in-circuit inspection is performed in the manufacturing process. In the in-circuit inspection, with the electronic components mounted on the board, a signal is sent to each electronic component using an in-circuit tester, and the number of components (resistance value, capacitor value, inductance value) is incorrect. It is inspected for defects, soldering openings and short circuits, lead floating, and IC malfunction. The in-circuit inspection is performed with the CPU and one-chip microcomputer removed from the board. When the in-circuit inspection is completed, a CPU or a one-chip microcomputer is mounted on the board and a function test is performed. The function test actually operates the control board and inspects whether or not the output of the electronic circuit board as a whole meets the specifications.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11, at the time of the in-circuit inspection of the comparative example, the in-circuit tester INC is connected to the payout control board 170, and the electric power from the in-circuit tester INC is passed through the electric power line a1 and the electric power line b1. Is supplied to the capacitor CA3. As a result, the capacitor CA3 stores electric charges. However, once the charge stored in the capacitor CA3 is not immediately released. Therefore, if the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170 after the in-circuit inspection is completed, the electric charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 may act on the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 may malfunction.

In short, as a result of mounting the capacitor CA3 as a backup power supply means on the payout control board 170, there is a possibility that the payout control microcomputer 171 may malfunction due to the electric charge remaining in the in-circuit inspection. In particular, the capacitor CA3 is an electric double layer capacitor that can store a large amount of electric charge but takes a relatively long time to release the electric charge. Therefore, electric charges tend to remain in the capacitor CA3, and as described above, there is a possibility that the payout control microcomputer 171 may malfunction.

Therefore, the electric circuit DK1 between the power supply unit 190, the payout control board 170, and the game control board 100 of the present embodiment is configured as shown in FIG. In the electric circuit DK1 of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 12, the description of the parts common to the configuration of the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example shown in FIG. 10 will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by a harness HN3. The connector CN5 at one end of the harness HN3 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and the connector CN6 at the other end of the harness HN3 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN3 is provided with a wiring H1 for supplying DC5V power (normal power supply) from the power supply unit 190, a wiring H2 for supplying DC5V power different from the normal power supply, and a wiring H3 serving as a ground wire. Has been done.

In the payout control board 170, the power line A1 and the power line A2 are provided in parallel. The power line A1 is connected to the wiring H1 of the harness HN3 via the connector CN6. As a result, normal power is supplied to the power line A1 via the wiring H1. The power line A2 is connected to the wiring H2 of the harness HN3 via the connector CN6. As a result, the electric power of DC5V, which is different from the normal power supply, is supplied to the electric power line A2 via the wiring H2. Further, in the payout control board 170, there is a power line A3 connected to the ground G. The power line A3 is connected to the wiring H3 of the harness HN3 via the connector CN6.

A filter NF1 similar to the filter NF1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN6 side of the power line A1. With this filter NF1, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the normal power supply supplied by the power line A1. Further, in the power line A1, a capacitor CA1 similar to the capacitor CA1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN7 side of the filter NF1. With this capacitor CA1, it is possible to prevent the voltage of DC5V from dropping when the fluctuation (load) of the current in the normal power supply becomes large. Further, in the power line A1, a capacitor CA2 similar to the capacitor CA2 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN7 side of the capacitor CA1. With this capacitor CA2, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the normal power supply supplied by the power line A1.

Further, the power line A1 has a power line C1 from the branch portion J1 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line C1 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power supply is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring H1, the power line A1, and the power line C1. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can be operated based on the normal power supply. The electric power line A1 and the electric power line C1 correspond to the "first specific electric power line".

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN4. The connector CN7 at one end of the harness HN4 is connected to the payout control board 170, and the connector CN8 at the other end of the harness HN4 is connected to the game control board 100. The harness HN4 is provided with a wiring H4 for supplying normal power and a wiring H5 for supplying backup power.

The power line A1 is connected to the wiring H4 via the connector CN7. The wiring H4 is connected to the power line D1 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN8. The power line D1 is connected to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the normal power supply is supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the wiring H1, the power line A1, the wiring H4, and the power line D1. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can be operated based on the normal power supply.

The filter NF2 is connected to the connector CN6 side of the power line A2. The filter NF2 is the same as the filter NF1 described above. With this filter NF2, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the power of DC5V supplied from the power supply unit 190 (hereinafter, also referred to as “charging power”). The charging power is DC 5V, which is the same as the normal power supply, but is only power for storing electric charge in the capacitor CA3. Further, in the power line A2, the same resistance T1 as the resistance T1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in series to the connector CN7 side of the filter NF2. With this resistance T1, it is possible to suppress the current of the charging power supplied by the power line A2. Further, a diode DO1 similar to the diode DO1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN7 side of the power line A2 with respect to the resistor T1. With this diode DO1, it is possible to prevent the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) from going from the diode DO1 to the connector CN6 side.

Further, a capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) similar to the capacitor CA3 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN7 side of the power line A2 with respect to the diode DO1. As a result, it is possible to supply a backup power source by discharging the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 at the time of power failure. Further, in the power line A2, a capacitor CA4 similar to the capacitor CA4 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN6 side of the capacitor CA3. With this capacitor CA4, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the backup power supply supplied by the power line A2.

Further, there is a branch portion J2 on the connector CN7 side of the power line A2 with respect to the capacitor CA4. There is a power line B1 heading from the branch portion J2 to the payout control microcomputer 171 and a power line B2 heading to the connector CN7. The power line B1 is connected to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. Thereby, when the power is cut off, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 can be supplied to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line A2 and the power line B1. The electric power line A2 and the electric power line B1 correspond to the "second specific electric power line".

Further, the power line B2 is connected to the wiring H5 via the connector CN7. The wiring H5 is connected to the power line D2 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN8. The power line D2 is connected to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. Thereby, when the power is cut off, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 can be supplied to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the power line A2, the power line B2, the wiring H5, and the power line D2. The portion including the capacitor CA3, the diode DO1, the power line A2, the power line B1, and the power line B2 corresponds to the "backup power supply circuit 179 (see FIG. 6)" of the present embodiment.

As described above, according to the electric circuit DK1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, in the payout control board 170, the power line A1 and the power line C1 (first specific power line), and the power line A2 and the power line B1 (first). (2 specific power lines) and each extend toward the payout control microcomputer 171 in a separated state. Therefore, it is possible to supply normal power to the payout control microcomputer 171 by the power line A1. Further, it is possible to supply the charging power to the capacitor CA3 by the power line A2 and store the electric charge in the capacitor CA3. When the power is cut off, the power line A2 and the power line B1 can supply the backup power supply to the payout control microcomputer 171.

Here, at the time of the in-circuit inspection of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the in-circuit tester INC is connected to the payout control board 170 with the payout control microcomputer 171 removed from the payout control board 170. At this time, the in-circuit tester INC controls so as to supply electric power to the electric power line A1 but not to supply electric power to the electric power line A2 and the electric power line B1. This makes it possible to perform in-circuit inspection without storing electric charge in the capacitor CA3. Therefore, even if the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170 after the in-circuit inspection is completed, it is possible to prevent the charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 from acting on the payout control microcomputer 171. .. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the payout control microcomputer 171 malfunctions. Since the other actions and effects of this embodiment are the same as the actions and effects of the above-mentioned comparative example, the description thereof will be omitted.

5. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, there are "big hits" and "missing" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure display 81. In the case of "off", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure display 81. When the jackpot is won, a "big hit game" is executed in which the jackpot 14 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. The jackpot game is also called a special game.

In this form, the jackpot game consists of multiple round games (unit games), an opening before the first round game starts (also referred to as OP), and an ending after the final round game ends (also referred to as OP). Also referred to as ED). Each round game begins with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ED. The closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, there are roughly two types in this embodiment. Probability change jackpot and normal jackpot. The probabilistic jackpot is a jackpot that controls the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high probability state described later. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that controls the gaming state after the jackpot game to the normal probability state (low probability state) described later.

More specifically, the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot that can be won in the lottery of special figure 1 (lottery of the first special symbol) are from 1R to 8R, and the maximum winning opening 14 is 29.5 seconds per 1R (predetermined). It is a big hit that opens for a period of time) and opens the big winning opening 14 for a maximum of 0.1 seconds (predetermined period) per 1R from 9R to 16R. That is, although the total number of rounds of these jackpots is 16R, the actual number of rounds is 8R. The actual number of rounds is the number of rounds in which a game ball can win up to the maximum number of winnings per round (8 in this embodiment). In these big hits, from 9R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening 14 is extremely short, and it is a round in which no prize ball can be expected. If the "probability change jackpot" is won by the lottery of the special figure 1, the "special figure 1_probability variation symbol" is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display 81a, and if the "normal jackpot" is won, the "special figure 1_probability change symbol" is stopped and displayed. "Special figure 1_normal symbol" is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display 81a.

In addition, for the probability variation jackpot and normal jackpot that can be won in the lottery of special figure 2 (lottery of the second special symbol), the big winning opening 14 from 1R to 16R is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds (predetermined period) per 1R. It's a big hit. In other words, these jackpots have a substantial number of rounds of 16R. If the "probability change jackpot" is won by the lottery of the special figure 2, the "special figure 2_probability variation symbol" is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display 81b, and if the "normal jackpot" is won, the second "Special figure 2_normal symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure display 81b.

Regardless of which jackpot is won, it is controlled to the electric support control state (high base state) described later after the jackpot game. The electric support control state continues until the next big hit winning if it is controlled according to the high probability state. On the other hand, when the control is performed in association with the normal probability state (low probability state), the number of electric support times (time reduction number) is set to 100 times. The number of times of electric support is the upper limit of the number of times of execution of the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the electric support control state.

As shown in FIG. 14, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of Special Figure 1 and the lottery of Special Figure 2 is 65% for the probabilistic jackpot and 35% for the normal jackpot. However, if the jackpot is won based on the lottery of Special Figure 1, the jackpot game with an actual number of rounds of 8 is executed, while if the jackpot is won based on the lottery of Special Figure 2, the actual number of rounds is 8 rounds. The lottery of the special figure 2 is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the special figure 1 in that the jackpot game with 16 rounds is executed.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the lottery for whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is performed based on the "big hit random number", and the lottery for the winning jackpot type is performed based on the "winning type random number". As shown in FIG. 15A, the jackpot random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit type random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 include "reach random numbers" and "variable pattern random numbers" in addition to the jackpot random numbers and the hit type random numbers.

The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the result of the jackpot determination is out of order. Reach is a state in which the staging symbol EZ that is variablely displayed is the remaining one among a plurality of staging symbols EZ, and it depends on which symbol the staging symbol EZ that is variablely displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of staging symbols EZ indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is slightly shaken in the display screen 50a, or may be displayed so as to be repeatedly enlarged and reduced. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255.

Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time. The variation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage to the gate 13 include ordinary symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) shown in FIG. 15B. The ordinary symbol random number is a random number for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 12D. Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 65535.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot (whether or not the jackpot game is executed) by using the jackpot determination table. As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16F, the jackpot determination table is provided corresponding to each of the set values. In this embodiment, six types of set values, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", or "6", are provided.

The set value is a parameter that determines the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination process (appropriately referred to as "big hit determination probability" or "big hit winning probability"). The set value is set by an employee of the amusement park or the like, as will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16F, the jackpot determination table corresponding to each set value includes a jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state and a jackpot determination table used in a high probability state. There is a table. The types of set values and the types of the jackpot determination table are not limited to the six types, and can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16F, a jackpot random number value determined to be a jackpot or a loss is assigned to each of the jackpot determination tables corresponding to each set value. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines whether it is a jackpot or a loss by using a jackpot determination table corresponding to a set value. In this embodiment, it is set not to win a small hit, but it may be set so that a small hit may be won. Further, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot and the method of distributing the jackpot random number value determined to be a jackpot are not limited to FIGS. 16A to 16F, and can be appropriately changed.

The setting whose setting value is "1" is called "setting 1", the setting whose setting value is "2" is called "setting 2", and the setting whose setting value is "3" is "setting 3". A setting with a setting value of "4" is called "setting 4", a setting with a setting value of "5" is called "setting 5", and a setting with a setting value of "6" is called "setting 6". Also called.

6. Description of the gaming state Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment will be described. The special figure display 81 and the normal figure display 82 of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 have a probability fluctuation function and a fluctuation time shortening function, respectively. The state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special figure display 81 is operating is referred to as a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not operating is referred to as a "normal probability state (non-high probability state)". In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal probability state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16A to 16F, the jackpot determination table used in the high probability state is larger than the jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state in each set value. It is set so that it can be easily judged as a big hit. Further, in the normal probability state or the high probability state of the gaming state, in the same gaming state, the higher the set value is set, the easier it is to be determined as a big hit.

Further, the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function of the special figure display 81 is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special figure display 81 is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time-reduced state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-reduced state. That is, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table in which the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time reduction state (see FIG. 18). That is, when the variable time shortening function of the special symbol display 81 is activated, it becomes easier to select a short variable time as the variable time of the variable display of the special symbol as compared with the case where the special symbol display 81 is not activated. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with the smooth progress of the game.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special figure display 81 may be operated at the same time, or only one of them may be operated. The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal figure display 82 are operated in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function of the special figure display 81. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal figure display 82 operate in the time saving state and do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the hit judgment (judgment of the normal symbol) is performed using the normal symbol hit judgment table in which the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) judged to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol hit judgment table used in the non-time saving state (judgment of the normal symbol). See FIG. 17 (B)). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal figure display 82 is activated, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal figure display 82 is a normal hit symbol is higher than when it is not activated. ..

Also, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 7 seconds in the non-time saving state, but 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 17 (C)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 19). That is, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 12D is operating. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (see FIG. 19). That is, the function of increasing the number of times of opening of the electric chew 12D is operating.

In the situation where the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal figure display 82, and the opening time extending function and the opening number of times increasing function of the electric chew 12D are operating, those functions are not activated as compared with the case where these functions are not activated. Therefore, the electric chew 12D is frequently opened, and the game ball frequently wins a prize at the second starting port 12. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these functions are operating is referred to as a "high base state", and the state in which these functions are not operating is referred to as a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second starting port 12 by the electric chew 12D) is being executed. Therefore, the high base state is also referred to as an electric support control state or a ball entry easy state. On the other hand, the low base state is also called the non-electric support control state or the non-ball entry easy state.

The high base state does not have to activate all of the above functions. That is, the operation of one or more of the probability fluctuation function of the normal figure display 82, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal figure display 82, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 12D, and the opening frequency increasing function of the electric chew 12D. It suffices if the electric chew 12D is easier to open than when the function is not operating. Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the probabilistic jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly called "high accuracy and high base state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (10000 times in this embodiment), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In other words, in this embodiment, the high accuracy and high base state is substantially continued until the next big hit. In addition, the end condition of the high accuracy and high base state may be only that the big hit is won and the big hit game is executed.

Further, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the normal jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, that is, a low probability state), a time saving state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly called "low accuracy and high base state". The low accuracy high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

When playing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state is referred to as a "normal game state". Further, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed is referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Further, a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state is referred to as a "privilege gaming state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 6R (see FIG. 4) by hitting right. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 12D than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 12 than to win the first starting port 11. .. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 13 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is hit right to win the second starting port 12. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, the game is played by right-handed even during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 6L (see FIG. 4) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 12D compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 11 than to win the second starting port 12. Because it has become. Therefore, a left-handed strike is performed so that the game ball can be won in the first starting port 11. This allows you to get more start-up prizes than right-handed.

7. The game control board unit and the method of changing and confirming the set value Next, the game control board unit 100B, the method of changing the setting, and the method of confirming the setting will be described in order. First, the game control board unit 100B will be described. 20 (A) is a perspective view of the game control board unit 100B, FIG. 20 (B) is a front view of the game control board unit 100B, and FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the game control board unit 100B. be. As described above, the game control board unit 100B includes a game control board 100 and a game control board case 100A.

As shown in FIG. 21, the game control board case 100A includes a lid case 410 that covers the component mounting surface (rear surface) side of the game control board 100, and a bottom case 420 that covers the solder surface (front surface) side of the game control board 100. , Is equipped. The game control board 100 is screwed to the lid case 410, and the lid case 410 is assembled to the bottom case 420. In this way, the game control board 100 is housed inside the game control board case 100A (see FIG. 20A). After accommodating the game control board 100, the game control board case 100A is hermetically sealed with caulking pins 430 and 430 on the left side and the right side (see FIG. 20B).

A game control microcomputer 101 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction and the center in the up-down direction of the game control board 100 via an IC socket. Further, a 7-segment display 300 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction and the lower part in the up-down direction (below the game control microcomputer 101) of the game control board 100. The game control board case 100A is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin (for example, polycarbonate). Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the mounted parts such as the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 from the outside of the game control board case 100A.

Further, a setting key cylinder 180 is mounted on the lower left portion of the game control board 100 (the lower right portion when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is viewed from the rear). As shown in FIG. 21, the mounting position of the setting key cylinder 180 is a position separated from the peripheral edge of the game control board 100 by a predetermined distance. Specifically, the setting key cylinder 180 is mounted at a distance of about 2 cm from the lower edge 100a and the left edge 100b of the game control board 100, respectively. In this way, it is necessary to provide a gap between the setting key cylinder 180 and the peripheral edge of the game control board 100 (the setting key cylinder 180 is mounted in a region other than the peripheral edge of the game control board 100). This is so that the connector parts can be mounted according to the requirements. That is, if the space on which the connector parts can be mounted is left on the game control board 100 in this way, when a game machine (different model) of a different type from the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment is manufactured in the future. , The connector component can be easily added to the game control board without significantly changing the wiring pattern of the game control board 100. That is, it is possible to standardize the wiring pattern (wiring pattern other than the connector component) of the game control board between different models.

The setting key cylinder 180 is a switch component capable of switching between an ON state and an OFF state by using a dedicated setting key 184 (see FIG. 20A). As shown in FIG. 21, the setting key cylinder 180 includes a rotating portion 183 (inner cylinder, inner cylinder portion) rotatably provided inside the fixing portion 182 (outer cylinder, outer cylinder portion). .. The rotating portion 183 is provided with a keyhole 185 for inserting the setting key 184.

The setting key 184 is inserted into the keyhole 185 of the setting key cylinder 180, and the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is turned from the OFF position (also called the standby position or the initial position, which is shown by the solid line in FIG. 29) to the ON position (rotation). By rotating to the position (position shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 29), which is also called the position or the moving position, the switching circuit in the setting key cylinder 180 (see the setting key cylinder switch 180a described later and FIG. 27) is switched ON / OFF. be able to. The state in which the setting key cylinder switch 180a is OFF is referred to as an OFF state of the setting key cylinder 180, and the state in which the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON is referred to as an ON state of the setting key cylinder 180. Further, the ON position of the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is a position rotated by 90 degrees from the OFF position. Further, the fact that the setting key 184 (rotating unit 183) is in the ON position (rotating position) is also referred to as "the setting key cylinder 180 is in the rotating position", and the setting key 184 (rotating unit 183) is in the OFF position (standby). The fact that it is in the position) is also referred to as "the setting key cylinder 180 is in the standby position".

As shown in FIG. 21, the setting key cylinder 180 has a key insertion side portion 187 having a keyhole surface 186 provided with a keyhole 185, and a lead portion 199 (see FIG. 22) connected to the game control board 100. It is provided with a board connection side portion 188. The key insertion side portion 187 is a portion of the setting key cylinder 180 on the lid case 410 side, and is a portion that looks like a substantially cylindrical shape in FIG. 21. Further, the board connection side portion 188 is a portion of the setting key cylinder 180 on the game control board 100 side, and is a portion that looks like a substantially quadrangular prism in FIG. 21. That is, the key insertion side portion 187 is the rear side when the setting key cylinder 180 is divided into two parts in the axial direction, and the board connection side portion 188 divides the setting key cylinder 180 into two parts in the axial direction. This is the front side of the cylinder.

Here, the configuration of the setting key cylinder 180 will be described in more detail. 22 (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 20 (B), and FIG. 22 (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 20 (B). As shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, the setting key cylinder 180 has a metal fixing member 198 fitted on the outside of the cylinder portion 197 (the portion including the fixing portion 182 and the rotating portion 183). Is. The cylinder portion 197 has a flange portion 197a (in other words, a surface orthogonal to the axial direction of the cylinder portion 197), which is thicker than the diameter of the keyhole surface 186, at an intermediate portion (substantially center) in the axial direction (front-back direction). A flange portion 197a larger than the keyhole surface 186, which corresponds to a "specific portion") is provided. The fixing member 198 is provided with a substantially circular opening (see FIG. 21), through which the keyhole surface 186 side of the cylinder portion 197 is inserted. Further, the fixing member 198 is hooked on the flange portion 197a. The connection piece 198a and the connection pin 198b formed on the fixing member 198 are soldered to the game control board 100, and the lead portion 199 extending from the cylinder portion 197 is soldered to the game control board 100. In this way, the setting key cylinder 180 is attached to the game control board 100. The key insertion side portion 187 described above is a portion (a portion on the lid case 410 side) behind the fixing member 198 in the setting key cylinder 180 (see FIG. 21), and the board connection side portion 188 is the setting key cylinder. It is a part other than the key insertion side part 187 in 180.

Next, the relationship between the setting key cylinder 180 and the game control board case 100A will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, the lid case 410 of the game control board case 100A is provided with an opening 411 for exposing the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 to the outside. When viewed from the rear, the opening 411 has a circular shape having a diameter slightly larger than that of the circular keyhole surface 186 (see FIG. 20B). In a state where the game control board case 100A accommodates the game control board 100, the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 are substantially flush with each other (FIG. 22A). (B)). The gap L1 between the key insertion side portion 187 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the opening 411 of the lid case 410 is about 1 mm or less.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 (A) and 22 (B), the inner surface 410b (see FIG. 22) of the lid case 410 is on the front side (toward the bottom case 420) from the peripheral edge of the opening 411. A peripheral wall portion 413 extending toward the wall is provided. The peripheral wall portion 413 includes an upper wall portion 413a surrounding the upper part of the opening 411, a lower wall portion 413b surrounding the lower part of the opening 411, a left wall portion 413c surrounding the left side of the opening 411, and the right side of the opening 411. It is a rectangular peripheral wall composed of a right wall portion 413d surrounding the side. The length dimension L2 (see FIG. 22A) of the peripheral wall portion 413 in the front-rear direction is about 8 mm, and the thickness L3 of the peripheral wall portion 413 (see FIG. 22A) is about 2 mm. In a state where the game control board case 100A accommodates the game control board 100, the peripheral wall portion 413 surrounds the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the board connection side portion 188 of the setting key cylinder 180 up to the flange portion 197a of the setting key cylinder 180 ( See FIG. 22 (A)). The gap L4 between the peripheral wall portion 413 and the substrate connection side portion 188 is about 1 mm or less. Further, the gap L5 between the peripheral wall portion 413 and the component mounting surface of the game control board 100 is about 5 mm.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game control board case 100A is provided with a peripheral wall portion 413 that surrounds the setting key cylinder 180 according to the shape of the setting key cylinder 180. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting key cylinder 180 from being displaced due to an external force such as its own weight. As a result, it is possible to maintain good connection of the setting key cylinder 180. If only the prevention of displacement due to the weight of the setting key cylinder 180 is considered, only the lower wall portion 413b of the peripheral wall portions 413 may be provided.

Further, in this embodiment, the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 are substantially on the same plane (see FIG. 22). That is, the keyhole surface 186 does not protrude or retract with respect to the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A (see FIG. 20A). Therefore, as compared with the case where the setting key cylinder 180 protrudes from the game control board case 100A, it is possible to secure a space behind the game control board case 100A and prevent the setting key cylinder 180 from being damaged. Further, since the gap between the setting key cylinder 180 and the opening 411 can be almost eliminated as compared with the one retracted with respect to the game control board case 100A (the opening 411 is closed by the setting key cylinder 180). Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter from entering the game control board case 100A from the opening 411. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent use of the setting key cylinder 180 and malfunction of the game control board 100.

In particular, in this embodiment, the opening 411 of the game control board 100 is closed by the setting key cylinder 180, and the peripheral wall portion 413 provided on the game control board 100 is around the board connection side portion 188 of the setting key cylinder 180. (See FIGS. 20 (A) and 22 (A) (B)). Therefore, it is more difficult to perform fraudulent acts such as intruding a foreign substance (for example, a wire, a piano wire, etc.) from the opening 411 to access the game control microcomputer 101 or the like. Further, since the setting key cylinder 180 is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 413, a foreign matter (for example, a wire, a piano wire, etc.) may be allowed to enter the inside of the game control board case 100A from a place other than the opening 411. However, it is possible to suppress contact with the setting key cylinder 180. Further, it is possible to make it difficult for the state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a, which will be described later, to be switched due to the influence of illegal magnetism.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 23, various stickers are attached to the game control board case 100A. In this embodiment, there are four stickers attached to the game control board case 100A: a model name sticker 510, an external terminal information sticker 520, a board management sticker 530, and a seal sticker 540. Each of these stickers is a model information sticker showing information about the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

The model name sticker 510 is a model information sticker on which the model name, manufacturer name, and the like of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are described.

Further, the external terminal information sticker 520 is a model information sticker in which an explanation regarding the external terminal of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is described. The external terminal (not shown) of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a terminal for outputting information from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 to an external device such as a hall computer. There are multiple types of external terminals. Specifically, for example, a prize ball signal indicating information on the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine PY1, a frame opening signal indicating that the game machine frame 2 is open, and special figures 1 and 2 are stopped and displayed. There are a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the game has been played, a jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, a jackpot signal 2 indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, or a time saving state is in progress. The connector portion of each external terminal is colored differently from each other. The correspondence between the color and the signal is described on the external terminal information sticker 520.

The board management sticker 530 describes the control number of the game control board 100 (game control board unit 100B), and when the game control board case 100A is opened for inspection or the like (caulking pins 430 and 430 are removed). This is a model information sticker provided with an entry field for the person who opened the game control board case 100A (when the seal is released) and the date of opening.

The seal sticker 540 is a model information sticker on which the characters "opening prohibited" indicating that the game control board case 100A must not be opened are described. The seal 540 is affixed across both the lid case 410 and the bottom case 420 with the lid case 410 locked to the bottom case 420 (that is, with the game control board case 100A closed). There is. Therefore, when the game control board case 100A is opened, the seal seal 540 is broken. Therefore, by looking at the seal seal 540, it is possible to know whether or not the game control board case 100A has been opened. In other words, the seal sticker 540 is a model information sticker that clearly indicates whether or not the game control board case 100A has been opened. The model information stickers (model name sticker 510, external terminal information sticker 520, board management sticker 530) other than the seal seal 540 are attached to the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 as shown in FIG. 23, and the bottom case 420. It is not affixed across. The seal may be provided with an IC chip with an antenna, and the ID information stored in the IC chip may be readable by a dedicated reader.

Further, the information described on each model information sticker (model name sticker 510, external terminal information sticker 520, board management sticker 530, seal sticker 540) can be appropriately increased or decreased as long as the function of each model information sticker is not impaired. .. For example, information such as rated voltage and rated power may be described on the model name sticker 510. Further, as the model information sticker, it is not necessary to include all of the model name sticker 510, the external terminal information sticker 520, the board management sticker 530, and the seal sticker 540. The model name sticker 510, the external terminal information sticker 520, and the board management sticker 530 in this embodiment are printed with various model information and entry fields in a predetermined color such as white on a colorless and transparent base portion. .. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game control board case 100A to some extent through the sticker.

Here, as shown in FIG. 23, the model name sticker 510 and the external terminal information sticker 520 are located on the left side of the game control board case 100A (the right side when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front). It is affixed. On the other hand, the substrate management seal 530 and the seal seal 540 are attached to the right portion of the game control board case 100A (the left portion when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front). More specifically, the model name sticker 510 is the lower left portion of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the lower right portion when the rear surface 410a in the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front), and exposes the setting key cylinder 180. It is attached to the right side of the opening 411 (the left side when the rear surface 410a in the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front). Further, the external terminal information seal 520 is the upper left portion of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the upper right portion when the rear surface 410a in the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front), and is the model name seal 510 and the opening portion 411. It is affixed above. Further, the substrate management seal 530 is attached to the upper right portion of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the upper left portion when the rear surface 410a in the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front). Further, the sealing sticker 540 is the lower right portion of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the lower left portion when the rear surface 410a in the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front) and is attached below the substrate management seal 530.

As described above, in this embodiment, the model name sticker 510 and the external terminal information sticker 520 are the left side area of the lid case 410 (the right side area when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front, the first sticker sticking area). 415), the board management seal 530 and the seal seal 540 are attached to the right side area of the lid case 410 (the left side area when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front, the second seal attachment area 416). It is affixed. The area between the first sticker sticking area 415 and the second sticker sticking area 416 in the lid case 410 is a non-sticking area 417 to which no model information sticker is stuck. The non-sticking area 417 is located at a position corresponding to the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 mounted on the game control board case 100A. In other words, the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 are mounted on the game control board 100 at a position visible from the non-sticking area 417. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 are clearly visible from the non-attached area 417 without being impaired by various model information stickers. As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-sticking area 417 functions as a "window portion" that makes both the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 visible. Hereinafter, the non-sticking area 417 is also referred to as a common window portion 417.

Here, on the surface of the game control microcomputer 101, the model (chip name) and serial number of the game control microcomputer 101 (that is, information that can identify the game control microcomputer 101), such information, and the like are encoded. The two-dimensional code is printed. Further, on the surface of the gaming control microcomputer 101, a microcomputer model information sticker 550 on which a two-dimensional code in which the model name and manufacturer name of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and such information are coded is printed is affixed. .. From the common window unit 417, various information shown on the surface of the game control microcomputer 101 can be read visually or by using a code reader.

Further, not only the game control microcomputer 101 but also the 7-segment display 300 can be visually recognized from the common window unit 417. As will be described later, the set value and the base may be displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to clearly see the set value and the base from the common window portion 417. When viewed facing the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A, there is a distance of at least 510 minutes between the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180. Therefore, when the setting key cylinder 180 is operated with the right hand, it is difficult for the 7-segment display 300 to be hidden by the hand (or arm) that operates the setting key cylinder 180, and the display contents of the 7-segment display 300 can be visually recognized. It is difficult for situations that are difficult to do to occur. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting key cylinder 180 is located outside the information display area 418 including the first sticker sticking area 415, the second sticker sticking area 416, and the common window portion 417 (specifically, on the rear surface 410a in the game control board case 100A). When viewed face-to-face, it is located on the right side of the information display area 418). Therefore, when the setting key cylinder 180 is operated with the right hand, the information display area 418 is difficult to be hidden by the hand (or arm) that operates the setting key cylinder 180, and the visibility of the information display area 418 (that is, the game control microcomputer 101). , 7-segment display 300, model name sticker 510, external terminal information sticker 520, board management sticker 530, and seal sticker 540) are good.

Next, the 7-segment display 300 (display means) will be described. The display control of the 7-segment display 300 is executed by the game control microcomputer 101. The reason why the 7-segment display 300 is provided not on the effect control board 120 but on the game control board 100 is based on the following reasons. That is, the game control board 100 (game control microcomputer 101) is an inspection target of a test for confirming proper operation, and if the display of the set value is controlled by the game control board 100, the display of the set value is displayed. This is because reliability can be guaranteed.

As shown in FIG. 24, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-series 7-segment display (7-segment display), and includes a total of 32 lighting (light emitting) portions (segments). Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 includes a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340 in order from left to right. The four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 each have eight lighting portions (LED elements, segments) LB1 so as to be able to represent numbers, letters, symbols, and the like from "0" to "9", respectively. It has LB8, LB9 to LB16, LB17 to LB24, and LB25 to LB32. Since the 4-series 7-segment display is a distribution product that is widely distributed in the market, it is possible to inexpensively configure the display means by using the 4-series 7-segment display (7-segment display 300).

In this embodiment, any of the set values from "1" to "6" is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. When the set value is displayed, the lighting portions LB25 to LB32 of the fourth display area 340 emit light in a lighting mode (light emission mode in which light is continuously emitted) so as to represent the numerical value of the set value. When the set value is displayed in the fourth display area 340, nothing is displayed in the first display area 310, the second display area 320, and the third display area 330.

Next, a method of changing the set value will be described. In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode. The transition to the setting change mode can be performed only when the power is turned on. Here, not only the operation for shifting to the setting change mode, but also various operations that can be performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on will be collectively described. As shown in FIG. 25, there are four types of operations that can be performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on: a setting change mode transition operation, a setting confirmation operation, a RAM clear operation, and a normal power on operation.

The setting change mode transition operation (setting change enablement operation) is an operation for shifting to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. Specifically, it is an operation of turning on the power switch 195 (turning on the power switch 195) while turning on both the setting key cylinder 180 (setting key switch) and the RAM clear switch 191. By this operation, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is in the power-on state), and the mode after the power is turned on becomes the setting change mode. The operation for changing the setting and the operation for confirming the setting in the setting change mode will be described later. The setting change mode ends when the setting is confirmed. As a result, the game mode (one of the non-setting change modes) in which the game can be played is set.

The setting confirmation operation is an operation for shifting to the setting confirmation mode (one of the non-setting change modes). The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the set value cannot be changed, but the set value can be confirmed by displaying the set value on the 7-segment display 300. Specifically, the setting confirmation operation is an operation of turning on the power switch 195 (turning on the power switch 195) while turning on the setting key cylinder 180. In the setting confirmation operation, the RAM clear switch 191 is left in the OFF state. By such a setting confirmation operation, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and the mode after the power is turned on becomes the setting confirmation mode. The setting confirmation mode ends when a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. After the setting confirmation mode ends, the game mode becomes playable. The setting confirmation mode may be configured to end when the setting key cylinder 180 is turned off (the setting key is rotated to the OFF position).

The RAM clear operation is an operation for shifting to the RAM clear mode (one of the non-setting change modes). The RAM clear mode is a mode in which "RAM clear" is performed to initialize a predetermined storage area or the like of the game RAM 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 101. When the RAM is cleared, the game content so far is cleared. Even if the RAM is cleared, the information of the set value stored in the gaming RAM 104 is not erased and is retained. Further, even if the mode is changed to the RAM clear mode, the set value cannot be changed and the set value is not displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Specifically, the RAM clear operation is an operation of turning on the power switch 195 (turning on the power switch 195) while turning on the RAM clear switch 191. In the RAM clear operation, the setting key cylinder 180 is left in the OFF state. By such a RAM clear operation, electric power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the RAM is cleared. The RAM clear mode is automatically terminated when a predetermined process related to RAM clear is executed. When the RAM clear mode ends, the game mode becomes playable. In this embodiment, the RAM is cleared even when the setting change mode is terminated. However, by providing an operation that only clears the RAM without changing the setting in this way, it is possible to clear only the RAM with a smaller amount of work than the work amount of changing the setting. ..

The normal power-on operation is an operation for turning on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 without shifting to the setting change mode, shifting to the setting confirmation mode, and clearing the RAM. Specifically, the normal power-on operation is an operation in which both the setting key cylinder 180 and the RAM clear switch 191 are left in the OFF state, and the power switch 195 is turned on (the power switch 195 is turned ON). .. By this operation, electric power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 to enter a game mode in which the pachinko gaming machine can be played.

The above-mentioned four operations (setting change mode transition operation, setting confirmation operation, RAM clear operation, normal power-on operation) are generally performed by the employees of the amusement park, and are performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1. It is impossible for a player who cannot see the back side (see FIG. 8).

In this embodiment, as described above, in order to change the set value, it is necessary to satisfy the three conditions (based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition) and shift to the setting change mode. Specifically, the setting key cylinder 180 is set to the rotation position (ON state) rotated 90 degrees from the standby position (OFF state) by using the setting key 184, and the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed (ON state). ) To switch the power switch 195 from the OFF operation (OFF state) to the ON operation (ON state). The reason why these three conditions are set is based on the following reasons.

First, the condition that the power is turned on is to enable the employee of the amusement park to shift to the setting change mode only when the power is turned on. That is, this is to prevent a situation in which the player or the like can shift to the setting change mode during the variable display of the special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game, and the set value is changed during the game. Next, the condition of pressing the RAM clear switch 191 is to prevent the game from being started based on the information related to the game before the power is turned on, even though the set value has been changed. Because. That is, if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 is always erased (RAM clear) as described later. Therefore, for example, the remaining special figure hold is judged to be a big hit with the set value before the power is turned off, but the remaining special figure hold is judged to be a loss with the set value changed after the power is turned on. It is possible to prevent situations where game inconsistencies occur. Finally, the condition that the setting key cylinder 180 is in the rotation position is to confirm the intention of the employee of the amusement place to change the set value. That is, the setting change mode is a special mode in which the setting value can be changed to the last, and is to prevent the transition to the setting change mode at random or easily.

Next, when the set value is changed, the display mode on the 7-segment display 300 and the effect mode on the effect means (image display device 50, speaker 620, frame lamp 212, and board lamp 54) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26 (A), when the setting change mode transition operation is performed to shift to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 26 (B), the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 is displayed. The set value (for example, "1") that was set before the power was turned on is displayed. That is, the information of the set value set during the previous game is not deleted even in the blocked state. Therefore, when the setting change mode transition operation is performed when the power is turned on, the setting value set during the previous game is 7-segment based on the stored setting value information (hereinafter referred to as "setting value information"). It is displayed on the display 300. As a result, it is possible to first confirm the current set value (previously determined set value) when the power is turned on.

Further, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 26B, the setting changing image SH (mode suggestion image) indicating the characters "setting changing" is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. Will be done. The image SH during setting change suggests that the setting value can be changed. By starting the display of the image SH during setting change, it is possible to let the employee of the amusement park (hereinafter referred to as "setting changer") who changes the setting value know that the setting change mode has been correctly performed. Is. Further, the setting changing image SH continues to be displayed on the display screen 50a until the setting change mode ends. Therefore, the setting changer can clearly grasp the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode by the display period of the image SH during the setting change.

Further, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 26B, the speaker 620 outputs a voice (mode suggestion sound) stating that the setting can be changed. This "setting changeable" voice suggests that the setting value can be changed. By starting the voice "Settings can be changed", it is possible to make the person who changed the settings audibly understand that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode correctly. In addition, the voice "The setting can be changed" is repeatedly output until the setting change mode ends, except for the timing when the setting value is changed. Therefore, the person who changes the setting can clearly grasp the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode as long as he / she continues to hear the voice "The setting can be changed".

Further, when the setting change mode is entered, as shown in FIG. 26B, the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special first light emitting mode. The light emission in this special first light emission mode suggests that the set value can be changed. By starting the light emission in the first light emission mode, it is possible to make the setting changer know that the setting change mode has been correctly performed. Further, the light emission of the first light emitting mode by the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 continues until the setting change mode ends, except for the timing when the set value is changed. Therefore, the person who changes the setting can clearly grasp the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode as long as he / she keeps watching the light emission of the first light emission mode.

In this way, in this embodiment, not only the image SH during the setting change is displayed in the setting change mode, but also the voice "setting can be changed" is output and the light is emitted in the special first light emission mode. To. As a result, the setting changer can surely grasp the situation where the setting value can be changed both visually and audibly. And, the setting change mode of this embodiment is a complicated operation because it is necessary to satisfy the three conditions as described above. It is possible to determine whether or not the setting change mode transition operation has been correctly executed depending on whether or not the mode suggestion of light emission in the special first light emission mode is started.

Here, in the present embodiment, the set value can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 in the setting change mode. Specifically, each time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the set value is incremented by one in the order of "1" ⇒ "2" ⇒ "3" ⇒ "4" ⇒ "5" ⇒ "6". It is possible to make it. When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed while the set value is "6", the set value returns to "1". Therefore, each time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the set value is switched one by one, so that the method of switching the set value is made as simple as possible.

The existing RAM clear switch 191 is used as the operating means for switching the set value, and the dedicated operating means is not newly provided. Conventionally, the RAM clear switch 191 is used only for erasing the information stored in the game RAM 104 and the payout RAM 174 when the power is turned on, and is not used except when the power is turned on. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is used as both an operation means for switching the set value and an operation means for erasing the stored information of the game RAM 104 and the like, thereby reducing the number of parts. It is possible to plan.

However, even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed while the setting change mode is set, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 and the payout RAM 174 are stored at the timing of the pressing operation. The information related to the payout is not deleted. This is because the control process becomes complicated if the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 erase the stored information each time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. .. In this way, the information stored in the game RAM 104 and the payout RAM 174 is not erased while the setting change mode is set, and the control processing of the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 is complicated. It is preventing it from becoming.

As shown in FIG. 26 (B), when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed after the set value "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300, for example, when the setting change mode is entered, FIG. 26 (C) is shown. As shown in the above, the set value "2" is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. That is, the display of the set value "1" is switched to the display of the set value "2". This makes it possible for the person who changes the setting to know that the set value has been switched to "2".

Further, as shown in FIG. 26C, a set value change image YG (change suggestion image) indicating an upward arrow is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 so as to be superimposed on the setting changing image SH. Will be done. By displaying the set value change image YG, it is possible to make the person who changed the setting know that the set value has been changed (increased). The set value change image YG is displayed only for a few seconds after the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, and then disappears, and only the setting changing image SH is displayed again on the display screen 50a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (C), the voice "The set value has been changed" is output from the speaker 620. It is possible to let the person who changed the setting know that the setting value has been changed by the voice "The setting value has been changed". The voice "The setting value has been changed" is output only once, and then the voice "The setting can be changed" is repeatedly output as described above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (C), the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 emit light in a special second light emitting mode. By emitting light in this second light emitting mode, it is possible to make the person who changes the setting know that the set value has been changed. The light emission in the second light emission mode is executed only for a few seconds after the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, and then returns to the light emission in the first light emission mode as described above.

Subsequently, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed while the set value "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 as shown in FIG. 26 (C), 7 is performed as shown in FIG. 22 (D). The set value "3" is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the segment display 300. That is, the display of the set value "2" is switched to the display of the set value "3". This makes it possible for the person who changes the setting to know that the set value has been switched to "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (D), the set value change image YG is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the speaker 620 outputs the voice "the set value has been changed", and the frame lamp. The 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special second light emitting mode. From these, it is possible to make the person who changed the setting know that the set value has been changed again.

By the way, the person who changes the setting is basically facing the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (see FIG. 8), and when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed and operated, he / she is looking at the 7-segment display 300. Therefore, it is difficult for the setting changer to grasp the display of the setting value change image YG on the display screen 50a and the light emission in the special second light emission mode on the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54. Therefore, the display of the set value change image YG and the light emission in the special second light emission mode indicate that the set value has been changed mainly for the employees of the game hall around the pachinko gaming machine PY1. It means to suggest (notify). In this way, the employees of the surrounding amusement parks can grasp the change of the set value, so that it is possible to grasp that the set value has not been changed illegally.

In particular, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, as shown in FIGS. 26 (C) and 26 (D), the setting value change image YG is displayed on the display screen 50a rather than the setting changing image SH display (mode suggestion). Display (change suggestion) is given priority. Further, in the speaker 620, the output of the voice "the setting value has been changed" (suggestion of change) is prioritized over the output of the voice "the setting can be changed" (mode suggestion). Further, in the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54, light emission in the special second light emission mode (change suggestion) is prioritized over light emission in the special first light emission mode (mode suggestion). In this way, by giving priority to the suggestion that the set value has been changed over the suggestion that the set value can be changed, in the unlikely event that the set value is changed illegally, the employees of the surrounding amusement park It is possible to make it easier for members to notice cheating.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 26 (C) and 26 (D), the set value change image YG does not show the set value itself to be changed, but merely shows that the set value has been changed. Also, the voice "The setting value has been changed" does not indicate the setting value itself to be changed, but merely indicates that the setting value has been changed. In this way, in the setting change mode, the setting value is not shown by the staging means such as the image display device 50 and the speaker 620, except for the 7-segment display 300, which is mainly seen only by the setting changer. Therefore, even if the employees of the surrounding amusement park can grasp the situation where the set value can be changed and the change of the set value, it cannot grasp the value of the set value itself. Therefore, even if an outsider such as a player looks at the display screen 50a or hears the sound from the speaker 620 in the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent the set value from being grasped.

Next, a method of confirming the set value will be described. In order to confirm the set value, it is necessary to rotate the rotating portion 183 of the setting key cylinder 180 from the rotating position (ON position) to the standby position (OFF position) using the setting key 184 in the setting change mode. be. As a result, the setting change mode ends, and the last set value displayed in the setting change mode is confirmed. The operation of rotating the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) from the rotating position to the standby position is appropriately referred to as a "setting confirmation operation".

When the setting confirmation operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 26 (F), the setting value confirmation image SK indicating the characters "the setting value has been confirmed" is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. .. By displaying the set value confirmation image SK, it is possible to make the person who changes the setting or the employee of the surrounding amusement park know that the set value has been confirmed. The set value confirmation image SK is displayed for a very short time after the setting confirmation operation is performed, and then disappears.

Further, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 26 (F), the voice "The setting value has been confirmed" is output from the speaker 620. It is possible to let the person who changed the setting or the employee of the surrounding amusement park know that the set value has been confirmed by the voice "The set value has been confirmed". The voice "The set value has been confirmed" is output only once at the timing when the setting confirmation operation is performed.

Further, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 26 (F), the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special third light emitting mode. By emitting light in this third light emitting mode, it is possible to make the person who changes the setting or an employee of the surrounding amusement park know that the set value has been determined. The light emission in the third light emission mode is executed only for a very short time after the setting confirmation operation is performed, and then ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is completed by performing the setting confirmation operation, the set value displayed in the lighting mode (changeable mode) on the 7-segment display 300 (for example, “1” shown in FIG. 26 (D)). 3 ") disappears. That is, the set value is hidden (non-display mode). Then, instead of the 7-segment display 300, the initial display (see FIG. 26F) described later is executed. In this way, it is possible for the person who changes the setting to grasp the determination of the set value by changing the set value displayed in the lighting mode to the non-display mode. Further, since the set value is not displayed after the set value is confirmed, it is possible to make the confirmed set value less noticeable to the surroundings.

When the set value is determined in this way, as shown in FIG. 26 (F), as the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 from the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 are used. (See FIG. 24) lights up. By lighting all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 in this way, it is possible to clearly indicate the execution of the initial display to the setting changer who has performed the setting confirmation operation.

The meaning of the initial display on the 7-segment display 300 is as follows. The 7-segment display 300 displays the set value as described above, and also displays the base as described later. However, the set value or base displayed on the 7-segment display 300 is based on the premise that the 7-segment display 300 is functioning normally, and the 7-segment display 300 itself has a failure or malfunction. Or, it is not entirely possible that it has been tampered with.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the setting change mode ends, the initial display is automatically executed on the 7-segment display 300. This makes it possible for the person who changes the setting to know that the 7-segment display 300 is functioning normally. That is, it is possible to confirm that the setting value displayed in the setting change mode is the correct value. Furthermore, it is possible to recognize that the base displayed after the initial display will also be displayed correctly. If the mode does not shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after the power is turned on.

By the way, in this embodiment, the setting change mode is configured to end before the setting key 184 (rotating unit 183) is rotated to the standby position by the setting confirmation operation. Specifically, at the moment when the setting key 184 starts to move from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting change mode ends and the set value is fixed. Therefore, in the following, the configuration of the setting key cylinder switch 180a provided inside the setting key cylinder 180 and the configuration of the electric circuit around the game control microcomputer 101 will be described, and the timing for determining the set value will be explained in detail. do.

As shown in FIG. 27, the game control microcomputer 101 is provided with an input terminal P14 (see FIGS. 28 (A), (B), and (C)). The input terminal P14 inputs a switch signal of either "H" level (voltage higher than the upper limit threshold voltage) or "L" level (voltage lower than the lower limit threshold voltage) from the signal line E1. There is. If the game control microcomputer 101 inputs an "H" level switch signal (first signal) from the signal line E1, it determines that the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON, and determines that the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON, and the signal line E1 to the "L" level. If the switch signal (second signal) of is input, it is determined that the setting key cylinder switch 180a is OFF.

The signal line E1 is connected to the terminal s1 of the setting key cylinder switch 180a. A ground line E4 extending from the branch portion Q1 of the signal line E1 toward the ground G is provided. A resistor T2 is connected in series to the ground line E4, and the resistor T2 makes it difficult for current to flow from the signal line E1 to the ground line E4. In this way, while connecting the signal line E1 extending from the input terminal P14 to the setting key cylinder switch 180a, the ground line E4 is connected at the branch portion Q1 between the setting key cylinder switch 180a and the input terminal P14. ing. Then, the resistor T2 is set as a pull-down resistor. Therefore, in the signal line E1, the level of the switch signal is set to the "L" level unless the power of DC5V is supplied via the setting key cylinder switch 180a.

The setting key cylinder switch 180a is provided with terminal s2. A power line E2 is connected to the terminal s2, and DC5V power is supplied to the power line E2. In FIG. 27, the reference numeral Vc means that the electric power of DC5V is supplied. A resistor T3 is connected in series to the power line E2. Further, the setting key cylinder switch 180a is provided with the terminal s3. A ground line E3 extending toward the ground G is connected to the terminal s3.

Here, the setting key cylinder switch 180a is provided with a switching piece s4. One end of the switching piece s4 is connected to the terminal s1. On the other hand, the other end of the switching piece s4 can be brought into contact with the terminal s2 or the terminal s3 by the setting changer rotating the setting key 184. Thus, when the setting key 184 is in the standby position, the switching piece s4 is in contact with the terminal s3 (see the solid line in FIG. 27), and when the setting key 184 is in the rotating position, the switching piece s4 is in contact with the terminal s2. (See FIG. 28 (A)).

Next, the determination timing of the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (A), (B), and (C). FIG. 28A is a diagram showing a state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a when the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is in the rotating position. At this time, the terminal s1 and the terminal s2 are in a conductive state, and the power of DC5V supplied to the power line E2 is supplied to the signal line E1 via the setting key cylinder switch 180a. As a result, the "H" level switch signal is input from the signal line E1 to the input terminal P14 of the game control microcomputer 101. In this way, while the "H" level switch signal is input to the input terminal P14 of the game control microcomputer 101, the setting change mode is set.

Then, the setting changer rotates the setting key cylinder 180 from the rotation position to the standby position by the setting confirmation operation. FIG. 28B is a diagram showing a state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a at the moment when the setting key 184 starts to rotate from the rotation position. As shown in FIG. 28B, when the switching piece s4 is separated from the terminal s2, the terminal s1 and the terminal s2 are in a non-conducting state. Therefore, the power of DC5V supplied to the power line E2 is not supplied to the signal line E1 via the setting key cylinder switch 180a. At this time, since the signal line E1 connected to the input terminal P14 is connected to the ground line E4 at the branch portion Q1, the switch signal is switched from the “H” level to the “L” level. That is, the "L" level switch signal is input to the input terminal P14 of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the setting change mode ends and the setting value is confirmed.

Note that FIG. 28C is a diagram showing a state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a when the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is in the standby position. When the setting changer completely rotates the setting key cylinder 180 to the standby position by the setting confirmation operation, the switching piece s4 comes into contact with the terminal s3. At this time, similarly to the above, the power of DC5V supplied to the power line E2 is not supplied to the signal line E1 via the setting key cylinder switch 180a, so that the switch signal remains at the “L” level.

As can be seen from the above description, the determination timing of the set value is the timing shown in FIG. 28 (B), and the setting change mode ends as soon as the setting key 184 starts rotating from the rotation position. Therefore, as soon as the setting confirmation operation is started, the setting changer hides the setting value (for example, the setting value “3” shown in FIG. 26 (D)) displayed on the 7-segment display 300 in the setting change mode. (See FIG. 26 (F)). In other words, it is possible to hide the set value on the 7-segment display 300 before the setting key 184 has finished rotating to the standby position. In this way, by hiding the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 as soon as possible, it is possible to reduce the risk that the fixed set value will be grasped by the surroundings as much as possible.

In addition, when a busy game hall employee (setting changer) performs a setting confirmation operation before the game hall opens, the setting key 184 (rotating part 183) is correctly rotated to the standby position by careless or unfamiliar operation. There is a risk of not letting it. However, even if such a situation occurs, the switch signal input to the game control microcomputer 101 is switched from the "H" level to the "L" level (see FIGS. 28A and 28B), so that the setting is made. It is possible to fix the value and hide it. Therefore, it is possible to terminate the setting change mode even if the operation is careless or unfamiliar by the setting changer, and it is possible to prevent the setting value from being continuously displayed on the 7-segment display 300. .. Further, as the setting change mode ends earlier, the mode suggestion of displaying the image SH during the setting change, outputting the voice "setting can be changed", and emitting light in the special first light emission mode ends. The timing will be early. Therefore, even if the setting key cylinder 180 is not correctly rotated to the standby position due to careless or unfamiliar operation, it is possible to prevent the situation where the setting value can be changed from being continuously suggested.

On the other hand, in order to shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the setting key 184 (rotating unit 183) is firmly moved from the standby position (see FIG. 28 (C)) to the rotating position (FIG. 28 (A)). Must be rotated. That is, when the setting key 184 is rotated halfway from the standby position due to an unfamiliar operation or vibration of the setting changer, the switch signal does not switch from the "L" level to the "H" level (FIG. 28). (Refer to (B)), it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode. In this way, it is possible to change the setting value only when the setting changer reliably rotates the setting key 184 to the rotation position, and it is possible to prevent unintentional transition to the setting change mode as much as possible. be.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 29, the setting key cylinder 180 is arranged to the left of the 7-segment display 300. In other words, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the setting key cylinder 180 is arranged to the right of the 7-segment display 300 when viewed from the setting changer. Further, the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 are located below the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180, and closer to the setting key cylinder 180 than the 7-segment display 300 (as viewed from the setting changer). It is located on the right side of the setting key cylinder 180). Further, the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 are arranged side by side along the left-right direction.

When trying to change the setting (setting value), the person who changes the setting first opens the inner frame 21 so that the back side of the inner frame 21 can be touched, and the outer cover 25 is provided so as to be openable and closable. Open the open / close cover 25a. As a result, the setting key 184 can be inserted into the setting key cylinder 180 mounted on the game control board 100 arranged inside the outer cover 25.

Here, most setting changers try to operate the setting key 184 with their right hand, which is their dominant hand. At this time, if the setting key cylinder 180 is to the left of the 7-segment display 300 when viewed from the setting changer (that is, from the person facing the setting key cylinder 180), the setting changer's right hand (or The right arm) may cover the 7-segment display 300, making it difficult to see the display content (set value) of the 7-segment display 300.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting key cylinder 180 is arranged to the right of the 7-segment display 300 when viewed from the setting changer. As a result, the right hand (or right arm) of the setting changer is prevented from covering the 7-segment display 300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 from becoming difficult to see. It should be noted that such a positional relationship is a situation in which the setting value immediately before confirmation (the setting value immediately before being hidden) cannot be seen, and it is not possible to know what setting value has been confirmed, especially during the setting confirmation operation. It is effective in preventing it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 used for the setting value switching operation is below the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180, and is seen from the setting changer from the setting key cylinder 180. It is located on the right side. Therefore, when the setting changer performs the setting value switching operation with the right hand, which is the dominant hand, the right hand (or right arm) of the setting changer does not cover the 7-segment display 300. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visibility of the 7-segment display 300 at the time of switching the set value. Further, since the RAM clear switch 191 is located closer to the setting key cylinder 180 than the 7-segment display 300, the setting changer uses the dominant hand (right hand) that operates the setting key cylinder 180 to clear the RAM with less operation. It is possible to operate the switch 191.

Further, in the present embodiment, the power switch 195 used for the setting change mode transition operation is also provided at a position closer to the setting key cylinder 180 than the 7-segment display 300, like the RAM clear switch 191. Therefore, it is possible for the setting changer to operate the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 with a small number of operations by using the dominant hand (right hand) that operates the setting key cylinder 180. In particular, since the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 are arranged side by side at a slight interval, it is easy for the setting changer to operate both the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 at the same time with only one hand. .. Even during the setting change mode transition operation, the right hand (or right arm) of the setting changer does not cover the 7-segment display 300. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visibility of the 7-segment display 300 when shifting to the setting change mode.

If the above effects are not expected, the RAM clear switch 191 is placed below the 7-segment display 300 and closer to the 7-segment display 300 than the setting key cylinder 180 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine). It may be provided at a position on the back side of the PY1 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction (or at least a position on the left side of the setting key cylinder 180). With such a configuration, the setting changer can operate the RAM clear switch 191 with the left hand while holding the setting key 184 with the right hand (that is, while holding the operation standby of the setting key 184). Even in such an operation situation, since neither the right hand (or the right arm) nor the left hand (or the left arm) covers the 7-segment display 300, the workability of setting change and the visibility of the 7-segment display 300 are good. It is possible to make it.

Subsequently, returning to FIG. 27, the LED driver 350 will be described. The LED driver 350 is integrally incorporated inside the 7-segment display 300, and is not mounted on the game control board 100. In this way, by using the general-purpose 7-segment display 300 incorporating the LED driver 350, a space for mounting the LED driver on the game control board 100 becomes unnecessary. As a result, it is possible to control the display of the 7-segment display 300 while reducing the burden of design changes to the game control board 100.

As shown in FIG. 27, the game control microcomputer 101 is provided with a serial data transmission terminal TX3. Further, the LED driver 350 is provided with a serial data receiving terminal RXD. The serial data transmission terminal TX3 and the serial data reception terminal RXD are connected by a serial data line E5. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 can control the drive of the LED driver 350 by transmitting serial data via the serial data line E5. As a result, it is possible to perform display control of the set value, initial display, and display control of the base described later on the 7-segment display 300. By performing the display control by serial communication in this way, it is possible to simplify the wiring on the game control board 100 as compared with the case where the display control is performed by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the burden of design changes to the game control board 100.

As shown in FIG. 27, a damping resistor T4 is connected in series to the serial data line E5. With this damping resistor T4, it is possible to attenuate the noise in the serial data line E5. Further, the LED driver 350 is provided with an RST terminal. A reset signal line E6 is connected to the RST terminal. The reset signal line E6 is a line in which a reset signal is transmitted from the power supply unit 190 via the payout control board 170, and a capacitor CA5 is connected in parallel to the reset signal line E6. With this capacitor CA5, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reset signal drops to the "L" level even though the reset signal is at the "H" level due to the influence of static electricity or the like.

Next, a case where the information indicating the set value (set value information) is not stored in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described. The set value information is stored in the set value information storage unit 107 (set value information storage means, see FIG. 6) of the gaming RAM 104 each time the set value is selected (changed) in the setting change mode. However, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is shipped from the production factory (factory shipment), the set value information storage unit 107 does not store the set value information. In other words, no set value is set. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the set value information storage unit 107 is a storage area (storage means) provided in the game RAM 104, but is provided separately from the game RAM 104. It may be a storage means that exists.

In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the power is turned on in a state where no set value is set, it is possible to shift to the error mode. Even if no setting value is set, if the setting change mode transition operation is performed, the setting change mode is entered instead of the error mode. The error mode is a mode in which control related to the game cannot be executed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and is not canceled unless the power switch 195 is turned off to turn off the power.

In the error mode, as shown in FIG. 30A, in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, the lighting portions LB25, LB28, LB29, LB30, LB31 (see FIG. 24) are set to "E. It emits light in an error lighting mode so as to represent the character "". By this light emission, it is possible for the employees of the amusement park and the like to know that the error mode has been entered, that is, that the set value has not been set. The light emission (error suggestion) in this error lighting mode continues until the error mode is canceled by shutting off the power supply.

Further, in the error mode, as shown in FIG. 30B, an operation suggestion image SE indicating the characters "The setting value has not been set, please perform the setting change mode transition operation" is displayed on the display screen 50a. Is displayed. By displaying the operation suggestion image SE (error notification), it is possible to make the employees of the amusement park understand the situation in which the set value must be set. The display of the operation suggestion image SE continues until the error mode is canceled by shutting off the power supply.

Further, in the error mode, as shown in FIG. 30B, a special error sound is output from the speaker 620. At this time, as shown in FIG. 30B, the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 emit light in a special error light emitting mode. By outputting these error sounds (error notification) and emitting light in the error light emission mode (error notification), it is possible to make the employees of the amusement park understand that the mode has been changed to the error mode. It should be noted that the output of the error sound and the light emission in the error emission mode continue until the error mode is canceled by shutting off the power supply.

Here, in the present embodiment, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104 is not erased even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on. Therefore, once the setting value information storage unit 107 stores the setting value information by performing the setting change mode transition operation after factory shipment, the setting value information storage unit 107 does not store the setting value information thereafter. Does not occur. Therefore, in this case, the error mode will not be entered when the power is turned on from the next time onward. In short, the error mode is entered when the setting value has never been set and the setting change mode transition operation is not performed when the power is turned on. In this way, even when the RAM clear switch 191 is simply pressed or the power is not turned on (blocked state), the setting value information is not erased, and the error mode is unnecessarily shifted to. It is possible to prevent it. The set value information storage unit 107 is composed of volatile storage means (DRAM) so as to be able to handle a relatively large number of (frequent) accesses, and is, for example, a non-volatile storage means (EEPROM or the like). It may be configured.

8. Display of the base Next, the display of the base will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. In this embodiment, the base can be displayed on the 7-segment display 300. The base is the ratio of the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) acquired by the player to the number of shot balls (total number of shot balls), which is the number of game balls fired by the player. By checking the base on the 7-segment display 300, it is possible to grasp that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has been illegally modified, or that a failure or malfunction has occurred.

The base described in this embodiment means a base in a normal gaming state, a base in a jackpot gaming state, a base in a high probability state and a time saving state, and a base in a normal probability state and a time saving state. It does not mean the base from the time the power is turned on to the present time. That is, the base described below in this embodiment is acquired by the player in the normal game state with respect to the number of shot balls (total number of shot balls) which is the number of game balls fired by the player in the normal game state. It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls). Therefore, the total number of fired balls or the number of prize balls described below means the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state.

In this embodiment, the base is newly calculated every time the total number of launched balls reaches 60,000. Then, the base information (base information) calculated each time the number of shots reaches 60,000 is sequentially stored in the base information storage unit 108 (see FIG. 6) of the gaming RAM 104. However, the information of the base currently being calculated (hereinafter referred to as "current base") and the base calculated when the total number of launched balls reaches 60,000 before starting the calculation of the current base (hereinafter "once"). Information on the base (hereinafter referred to as "pre-base"), information on the base calculated when the total number of shots reached 60,000 before the previous base (hereinafter referred to as "two-time pre-base"), and twice. Up to the information of the base (hereinafter referred to as "three times previous base") calculated when the total number of shots reaches 60,000 before the front base is stored in the base information storage unit 108. In this way, in the 7-segment display 300, based on the current base information stored in the base information storage unit 108, the information of the one-time advance base, the information of the two-time advance base, and the information of the three-time advance base. , The current base, the one-time pre-base, the two-time pre-base, and the three-time pre-base can be displayed.

The timing of starting the display of the base differs depending on whether or not the setting change mode has been entered, that is, whether or not the setting change mode transition operation has been performed. When the setting change mode transition operation is performed, the setting change mode is shifted after the power is turned on as described above. In this case, the base display is started after the setting change mode is finished and the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display 300. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without performing the setting change mode transition operation, the display of the base is started immediately after the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after the power is turned on. In any case, the point that the display of the base is started after the initial display on the 7-segment display 300 does not change.

As shown in FIG. 31 (A), when the initial display is started on the 7-segment display 300, the initial display is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). Then, with the end of the initial display, the present-based display is started as shown in FIG. 31 (B). Here, when the current base is displayed, the current base (for example, "36") is displayed (% display) in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. .. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting mode (a mode in which light is continuously emitted) as shown by “bL.”. That is, looking at the light emission of the lighting mode of "bL.", It means that the base is currently displayed.

The present-based display shown in FIG. 31B is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). After that, if the information of the previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108 at the end of the display of the current base, the display of the previous base is started as shown in FIG. 31 (C). Here, when the one-time front base is displayed, the one-time front base (for example, "37") is displayed in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. .. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting mode as shown by "b1.". That is, looking at the light emission of the lighting mode of "b1.", It means that the previous base is displayed once.

The one-time advance-based display shown in FIG. 31 (C) is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). After that, if the information of the previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108 at the end of the display of the previous base, the display of the previous base is started as shown in FIG. 31 (D). To. Here, when the two-time front base is displayed, the two-time front base (for example, "35") is displayed in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. .. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting mode as shown by "b2.". That is, looking at the light emission of the lighting mode of "b2.", It means that the base is displayed twice before.

The display of the two-time advance base shown in FIG. 31 (D) is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). After that, if the information of the three-time previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108 with the end of the display of the two-time previous base, the display of the three-time previous base is displayed as shown in FIG. 31 (E). It will be started. Here, when the three-time front base is displayed, the three-time front base (for example, "38") is displayed in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. .. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting mode as shown by "b3.". That is, looking at the light emission of the lighting mode of "b3.", It means that the base three times before is displayed.

The display of the three-time advance base shown in FIG. 31 (D) is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). Then, with the end of the display of the three-time previous base, the display of the current base is started again as shown in FIG. 31 (B). After that, at predetermined specific time intervals, the current base display shown in FIG. 31 (B), the one-time front base display shown in FIG. 31 (C), and the two-time front base shown in FIG. 31 (D). The display and the display based on the previous three times shown in FIG. 31 (E) are repeatedly executed. The current base, the 1st base, the 2nd base, and the 3rd base are displayed with 1% as the standard unit, but for example, 5% may be displayed as the standard unit, and may be changed as appropriate. It is possible.

By the way, FIG. 31C shows a case where the information of the previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108 and the information of the previous base is displayed. On the other hand, when the information of the previous base is not stored in the base information storage unit 108, the display shown in FIG. 32 (C) is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 32 (C), in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, the lighting portions LB23 and LB31 (see FIG. 24) indicate “−−”. It emits light in the lighting mode. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a blinking mode (a mode in which light emission and extinguishing are repeated) as shown by "b1.". In this way, the flashing mode of "b1." And the display of "---" indicate that the previous base cannot be displayed yet.

Similarly, when the information of the previous base is not stored in the base information storage unit 108 twice, as shown in FIG. 32 (D), the third display area 330 and the fourth display of the 7-segment display 300 are displayed. In the region 340, the lighting portions LB23 and LB31 emit light in the lighting mode as shown by “−−”. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a blinking manner as shown by "b2.". In this way, the flashing mode of "b2." And the display of "---" indicate that the base twice before cannot be displayed yet.

Further, when the information of the previous base is not stored in the base information storage unit 108 three times, as shown in FIG. 32 (E), in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, as shown in FIG. 32 (E). , The lighting portions LB23 and LB31 emit light in the lighting mode as shown by "---". Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a blinking manner as shown by "b3.". In this way, the flashing mode of "b3." And the display of "---" indicate that the three-time previous base cannot be displayed yet. The base information storage unit 108 is composed of volatile storage means (DRAM) so as to be able to handle a relatively large number of (frequent) accesses, but is composed of, for example, non-volatile storage means (EEPROM or the like). It may have been done.

9. Transition after turning on the power Next, the transition after turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described separately for various operations. When the power is turned on, the power switch 195 is switched from the OFF operation (OFF state) to the ON operation (ON state). After turning on the power, it is divided into the following five cases.

First, as the first case, there is a case where the setting change mode transition operation is performed. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode as described above. After shifting to the setting change mode, the setting change mode does not end unless the setting key 184 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position. When the setting change mode ends, as described above, the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display 300, and then the base display is performed (see FIG. 31).

In this embodiment, the setting change mode transition operation includes pressing the RAM clear switch 191 when the power is turned on. However, when the setting change mode is set as described above, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 is not erased. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the setting change mode ends, the information related to the game is automatically deleted before the process related to the game (the game control process from step S101 to step S106 shown in FIG. 43) is executed. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being restarted in a state where the information related to the game stored before the power is turned on remains even though the set value is changed in the setting change mode. Further, when the setting change mode ends, the information related to the game is deleted without pressing the RAM clear switch 191 again. Therefore, the information related to the game is deleted without forcing the setting changer to duplicate the operation. Is possible.

However, if the information related to the game is deleted after the setting change mode is completed, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 is not deleted. This is because if the information related to the game is deleted and the set value information is also deleted, the set value determined in the setting change mode becomes meaningless. By not erasing the set value information in this way, the set value information remains stored even when the power is turned on next time. As a result, it is not necessary for the employees of the amusement park to set the set value again when the same set value as the previous time is sufficient, and it is possible to avoid an increase in the operation load.

As described above, when the setting change mode is completed, the game control microcomputer 101 erases the information related to the game. After that, the processing related to the game (game control processing from step S101 to step S106) is executed by the main side timer interrupt processing (S005, see FIG. 43) described later, and the initial display and the base on the 7-segment display 300. The process related to the display (base display process in step S108) is executed.

Next, as the second case, the setting change mode transition operation may not be performed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting value information is not stored. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the error mode is entered as described above. In the error mode, as shown in FIG. 30 (A), the 7-segment display 300 emits light in an error lighting mode so as to represent the character "E". As a result, it is possible to make the employee of the amusement park who sees the character "E" instead of the set value on the 7-segment display 300 understand that the set value has not been set yet. Further, in the error mode, as shown in FIG. 30B, a special error sound is output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special error light emitting mode. This makes it possible to more clearly indicate the transition to the error mode than when the letter "E" is indicated on the 7-segment display 300 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (see FIG. 8). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the person who has turned on the power switch 195 and the employees of the surrounding amusement park to recognize that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 cannot execute the game. When shifting to the error mode, the error mode cannot be canceled until the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is turned on next time, it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and set the set value (store the set value information).

Subsequently, as a third case, the RAM clear switch 191 may be pressed when the power is turned on while the set value information is stored. However, in the third case, when the power switch 195 is switched from the OFF operation to the ON operation, the setting key cylinder 180 is not rotated to the moving position. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 is erased without shifting to the setting change mode. However, even at this time, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 is not deleted. This is because if the set value information is erased, it is necessary to perform a setting change mode transition operation so as not to shift to the error mode at the next power-on, which complicates the operation. In this way, after the information related to the game is erased, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game-related process (game control process from step S101 to step S106) by the main side timer interrupt process (S005, see FIG. 43) described later. ), And the processing related to the initial display and the base display on the 7-segment display 300 (base display processing in step S108) is executed.

Subsequently, as a fourth case, the setting key 184 may be rotated to the rotation position when the power is turned on while the set value information is stored. However, the fourth case is a case where the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed when the power switch 195 is switched from the OFF operation to the ON operation. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting value confirmation mode without shifting to the setting change mode. Unlike the setting change mode, the setting value confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the setting value based on the stored setting value information, although the setting value cannot be selected. For example, when the setting value confirmation mode is entered when the setting value information indicating that the setting value is "1" is stored, the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 emits light so as to indicate "1". do. This set value confirmation mode ends after a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of displaying the set value on the 7-segment display 300. In this way, if the employee of the game hall simply wants to confirm which set value is set without erasing (ram clearing) the information related to the game when the power is turned on, the setting value confirmation mode can be entered. , It is possible to check the current setting value.

The transition to the set value confirmation mode may be, for example, the following cases. During the game by the player, a defect of the image display device 50 or a defect of the movable member (board movable body 55k, frame movable body provided in the gaming machine frame 2, AT opening / closing member 14k, electric chew opening / closing member 12k, etc.) May occur. In this case, the employee of the amusement park may turn on the power again by turning it on after turning off the power switch 195 in order to solve the above-mentioned problem. At this time, since the game is interrupted, the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed when the power is turned on so as not to erase the information related to the game. However, amusement park employees may want to check the set values. Therefore, in such a case, by setting the setting key 184 to the rotation position when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to the set value confirmation mode and confirm the set value on the 7-segment display 300. be. At this time, the set value is shown only on the 7-segment display 300, and the set value is not suggested by the effect means such as the image display device 50 and the speaker 620. This is to prevent the player from grasping the set value. It should be noted that an effect suggesting that the set value confirmation mode is set may be executed by an effect means such as the image display device 50 and the speaker 620.

When the set value confirmation mode ends, the game control microcomputer 101 basically does not clear the game-related information, but performs the game-related processing (step) by the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005, see FIG. 43) described later. The game control process from S101 to step S106) is executed, and the process related to the initial display and the base display on the 7-segment display 300 (base display process in step S108) is executed. However, if it is determined that the checksum of the game RAM 104 and the checksum of the game RAM 104 stored (stored) at the time of power failure do not match before the processing related to the game is executed, the exception is the case. Assuming that the stored content of the game RAM 104 is abnormal, the information related to the game is cleared.

Finally, as a fifth case, there is a case where the power switch 195 is simply switched from the OFF operation to the ON operation while the set value information is stored. That is, in the fifth case, the setting key 184 is not rotated to the rotation position when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed. In this case, the mode does not shift to the setting change mode or the setting value confirmation mode after the power is turned on. Therefore, as soon as the power is turned on, the game control microcomputer 101 basically does not clear the information related to the game, executes the process related to the game, and displays the initial display and the base display on the 7-segment display 300. Execute the relevant process. However, if it is determined that the checksum of the game RAM 104 and the checksum of the game RAM 104 stored at the time of power failure do not match before the processing related to the game is executed, the checksum of the game RAM 104 is exceptionally related to the game. The information is cleared.

10. Symbol setting suggestion effect and high setting suggestion effect In this embodiment, when the setting change mode is set as described above, the display screen of the image display device 50 is used to reduce the possibility that the set value is grasped by the surroundings as much as possible. An image suggesting a set value is not displayed at 50a. However, even after the setting change mode is finished, if the image suggesting the set value is not displayed at all on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the set value is set for the player during the game. It will not be possible to provide the entertainment that makes you guess. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the setting change mode is completed, the symbol setting suggestion effect or the high setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 to provide the player with interest. Is possible.

First, the symbol setting suggestion effect will be described. The symbol setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a set value set by either the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, or the right effect symbol EZ3 when the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. be. The left effect symbol EZ1 means an effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed in the left effect symbol display area on the left side of the display screen 50a. Further, the middle effect symbol EZ2 means an effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed in the middle effect symbol display area in the center of the display screen 50a. Further, the right effect symbol EZ3 means an effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed in the right effect symbol display area on the right side of the display screen 50a.

As shown in FIG. 33, the effect symbol EZ has a display mode in which a portion indicating a number (number portion) and a portion indicating a character are combined, and there are nine types of effect symbol EZ. In the following, the staging symbol EZ whose number part is "1" is called the first staging symbol EZa, the staging symbol EZ whose number part is "2" is called the second staging symbol EZb, and the number part is "3". A certain staging symbol EZ is called a third staging symbol EZc, a staging symbol EZ having a number part of "4" is called a fourth staging symbol EZd, and a staging symbol EZ having a number part of "5" is called a fifth staging symbol EZe. The staging symbol EZ whose number part is "6" is called the sixth staging symbol EZf, the staging symbol EZ whose number part is "7" is called the seventh staging symbol EZg, and the number part is "8". A certain staging symbol EZ is called the 8th staging symbol EZh, and the staging symbol EZ whose numerical value portion is "9" is called the 9th staging symbol EZi.

The symbol setting suggestion effect is executed when the jackpot determination is a loss. In this case, among the three staging symbols EZ (left staging symbol EZ1, middle staging symbol EZ2, right staging symbol EZ3) that are stopped and displayed using the staging pattern lottery table shown in FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (F). One of the staging symbols EZ is determined. The loss effect symbol lottery tables shown in FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (F) are provided according to the set values. Therefore, among the losing effect symbol lottery tables shown in FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (F), the table corresponding to the set value currently set is used. As shown in FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (F), the ratio of the effect symbol EZ corresponding to the set value among the first effect symbol EZa to the ninth effect symbol EZi is drawn as compared with the other effect symbols EZ ( Various loss effect design lottery tables are set so that the distribution rate) is high. Whether the effect symbol EZ determined in the various lost effect symbol lottery tables is the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, or the right effect symbol EZ3 is determined by lottery. The remaining two staging symbols EZ other than the staging symbol EZ determined in the losing staging symbol lottery table are determined by lottery using the staging symbol lottery table (not shown) based on the variation pattern.

As described above, for example, when the set value is set to "6" and the staging symbol EZ is stopped and displayed in the loss stop mode, either the left staging symbol EZ1, the middle staging symbol EZ2, or the right staging symbol EZ3. The frequency with which the sixth effect symbol EZf is set increases. That is, when the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 35 (B) after the variable effect is started as shown in FIG. 35 (A). Any one of the three staging symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is likely to be stopped and displayed on the sixth staging symbol EZf. As a result, the player is made to grasp a relatively large number of stop displays of the sixth effect symbol EZf, and it is possible to infer that the set value is "6". In other words, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which effect symbol EZ has a high frequency of stop display even if it is lost, and it is possible to provide a novel game interest.

Next, the high setting suggestion effect will be described. The high setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the set value is a high setting of "4", "5", or "6" when the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed due to SP reach loss. This high setting suggestion effect may be executed only when the set value is set to "4", "5", or "6", and the set value is "1", "2", or "3". If it is set to "", it will not be executed. Therefore, the player can grasp that the set value is "4", "5", or "6" at the stage of grasping the execution of the high setting suggestion effect.

Here, the high setting suggestion effect of this embodiment is a multiple of 10,000 shots such as 10,000 shots, 20,000 shots, 30,000 shots, 40,000 shots, 50,000 shots, and 600,000 shots under the condition that the SP reach is lost. Executed when the conditions reached are met. The condition of SP reach loss is provided in order to maintain the player's motivation to play by executing the high setting suggestion effect for the player who is greatly discouraged by SP reach loss. Further, the condition that the number of shot balls reaches a multiple of 10,000 shots is provided in order to make the high setting suggestion effect a privilege that can be executed very rarely.

Specifically, the high setting suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. That is, after reaching the reach, the battle effect is executed as the SP reach as shown in FIG. 36 (A). In FIG. 36 (A), as a battle effect, a battle image BT showing that the main character and the rival character fight in baseball is displayed on the display screen 50a. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), the battle defeat production is executed as SP reach loss. In FIG. 36B, as a battle defeat effect, a battle defeat image BH showing that the main character has been defeated by an enemy character is displayed on the display screen 50a. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36 (C), the staging symbol EZ (left staging symbol EZ1, middle staging symbol EZ2, right staging symbol EZ3) is stopped and displayed in a lost mode (for example, "191"). In this way, with the player grasping the SP reach loss, the high setting suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 36 (D). Specifically, in FIG. 36 (D), as a high setting suggestion effect, an immortal bird image FT (suggestion effect image) showing that the phoenix flies and appears is displayed on the display screen 50a. As a result, the player who sees the phoenix image FT is made to understand that the set value is "4", "5", or "6", forgets the disappointment of SP reach loss, and is large due to the high setting. It is possible to give an uplifting feeling.

11. Transition signal input timing Next, the transition signal input timing will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (A). The transition signal is a signal input to the game control microcomputer 101 in order to shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on. Specifically, an "L" level or "H" level switch signal (hereinafter referred to as "") input from the setting key cylinder switch 180a (see FIG. 27) to the input terminal P14 of the game control microcomputer 101 via the signal line E1. Also referred to as "setting key cylinder signal (transition operation signal)") and "L" level or "H" level switch signal (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear switch signal (RAM)" input from the RAM clear switch 191 to the game control microcomputer 101. It is also called "clear signal)"). The above-mentioned power-on time (power-on timing) means a timing at which the game control microcomputer 101 starts to operate when power (normal power supply) is supplied to the game control microcomputer 101.

By the way, it is generally considered that the game control microcomputer 101 shifts to the setting change mode based on the input of the setting key cylinder signal and the RAM clear switch signal when the power is turned on. That is, a method of making the input timing of the transition signal (setting key cylinder signal, RAM clear switch signal) for shifting to the setting change mode the same as the timing of turning on the power is generally considered.

However, since the fraudster generally considers that the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal are the same as the timing of turning on the power, in the case of the above method, the setting key cylinder The signal input timing and the RAM clear switch signal input timing are known to the fraudster. As a result, the fraudster controls the game, for example, at the timing of turning on the power, the fraudulent signal similar to the "H" level setting key cylinder signal and the fraudulent signal similar to the "H" level RAM clear switch signal. There is a possibility of performing a fraudulent act such as inputting the signal to the microcomputer 101 to illegally shift to the setting change mode.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal are not easily grasped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), eight types of input timing patterns from the input timing pattern A to the input timing pattern H are provided as the input timing patterns of the transition signal. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 determines one of eight types of input timing patterns by lottery. As a result, the input timing pattern of the transition signal is randomly determined, and it is possible to prevent the fraudster from easily grasping the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal. Is.

Here, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), in the case of the input timing pattern A, the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the setting key cylinder signal 500 ms after the power-on timing, and the RAM clear switch signal is also turned on. Input after 500 ms from the timing of. Further, in the case of the input timing pattern B, the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the setting key cylinder signal 1000 ms after the power-on timing, and also inputs the RAM clear switch signal 1000 ms after the power-on timing. Further, in the case of the input timing pattern C, the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the setting key cylinder signal 1500 ms after the power-on timing, and also inputs the RAM clear switch signal 1500 ms after the power-on timing. Further, in the case of the input timing pattern D, the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the setting key cylinder signal 2000 ms after the power-on timing, and also inputs the RAM clear switch signal 2000 ms after the power-on timing.

Further, in the case of the input timing pattern E, the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the setting key cylinder signal 500 ms after the power-on timing, and inputs the RAM clear switch signal 1000 ms after the power-on timing. Further, in the case of the input timing pattern F, the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the setting key cylinder signal 1000 ms after the power-on timing, and inputs the RAM clear switch signal 1500 ms after the power-on timing. Further, in the case of the input timing pattern G, the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the setting key cylinder signal 1500 ms after the power-on timing, and inputs the RAM clear switch signal 500 ms after the power-on timing. Further, in the case of the input timing pattern H, the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the setting key cylinder signal 2000 ms after the power-on timing, and inputs the RAM clear switch signal 1000 ms after the power-on timing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting key cylinder signal and the RAM clear switch signal are delayed from the power-on timing of the game control microcomputer regardless of the input timing pattern from the input timing pattern A to the input timing pattern H. It is input to 101. Therefore, when the input timing of these transition signals is for a fraudster who thinks that the setting key cylinder signal and the RAM clear switch signal will be input to the game control microcomputer 101 at the same timing as the power-on timing. It is possible to make it difficult to understand.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 randomly determines any input timing pattern from the input timing pattern A to the input timing pattern H by lottery. Therefore, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal are not fixed at a certain timing after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the fraudster to know when these transition signals are input to the game control microcomputer 101.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the input timing pattern E, the input timing pattern F, the input timing pattern G, and the input timing pattern H (see FIG. 37 (A)), the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the RAM clear switch signal are used. The input timing of is different. That is, even if the setting key cylinder signal and the RAM clear switch signal are both transition signals, the timing of input to the game control microcomputer 101 may be different. This makes it difficult for fraudsters who think that the setting key cylinder signal and the RAM clear switch signal will be input to the game control microcomputer 101 at the same time to know when the input timing of these transition signals is. It is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the input timing pattern A, the input timing pattern B, the input timing pattern C, and the input timing pattern D (see FIG. 37 (A)), the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the RAM clear switch signal are used. The input timing of is the same. On the other hand, as described above, in the input timing pattern E, the input timing pattern F, the input timing pattern G, and the input timing pattern H (see FIG. 37 (A)), the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal is used. The input timing of the RAM clear switch signal is different. Therefore, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal may or may not be the same at random, and when the input timing of these transition signals is set to the fraudster. It is possible to make it more difficult to understand.

Each input timing pattern from the input timing pattern A to the input timing pattern H shown in FIG. 37 (A) is provided in the input timing pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (B), and the input timing pattern determination table is provided. , Stored in the gaming ROM 103. As will be described later, the game control microcomputer 101 inputs any of the input timing patterns A to the input timing pattern H by lottery using the input timing pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (B) at the timing of turning on the power. Determine the timing pattern. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the setting key cylinder signal and the RAM clear switch signal at the input timing based on the determined input timing pattern. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the setting according to the level of the setting key cylinder signal (“H” level or “L” level) and the level of the RAM clear switch signal (“H” level or “L” level). It is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the mode.

12. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 49.

[Main control main process] The game control microcomputer 101 provided on the game control board 100 reads out and executes the main control main process program shown in FIG. 38 from the game ROM 103 when the power is turned on. The counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 101 are provided in the game RAM 104. The initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

As shown in FIG. 38, in the main control main process, first, a power-on process (S001) described later is performed. Following the power-on processing (S001), interrupts are disabled (S002), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is executed (S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003), various random number counter values shown in FIG. 15 are added and updated by 1. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, interrupts are enabled (S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. That is, for example, it is executed in a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process (S005) and the start of the next main timer interrupt process (S005), various counters by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003). The value update process is executed repeatedly. If an interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S004).

[Power-on processing] As shown in FIG. 39, in the power-on processing (S001), the game control microcomputer 101 first sets the permission for access to the game RAM 104 (S009). This makes it possible to write and read information to the gaming RAM 104. Next, a setting value designation command for notifying the setting value information (setting value information) stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 is transmitted to the effect control board 120 (S010). .. As a result, the effect control board 120 receives the set value designation command when the power is turned on, so that the effect control microcomputer 121 can grasp the set value set in the previous game. However, in the process of step S010, if the set value information is not yet stored in the set value information storage unit 107, the game control microcomputer 101 does not send the set value designation command.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the transition signal input process (S200), and then executes the processes after step S011. Here, before explaining the processing after step S011, the transition signal input processing (S200) will be described first based on FIG. 40. The transition signal input process is a process for inputting a setting key cylinder signal and a RAM clear switch signal, which are transition signals.

[Transition signal input processing] As shown in FIG. 40, in the transition signal input processing (S200), the game control microcomputer 101 first executes an input timing lottery process (S201). Specifically, in the input timing lottery process (S200), the game control microcomputer 101 acquires an input timing pattern random number and uses the input timing pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (B) to acquire the input timing pattern. Determine a random number. As a result, any input timing pattern from the input timing pattern A to the input timing pattern H is determined. As a result, the setting key cylinder switch signal and the RAM clear switch signal can be randomly input after the power-on timing.

After the input timing pattern is determined in step S201, in step S202, it is determined whether or not the input timing of the setting key Linda signal is earlier than the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal in the determined input timing pattern. That is, it is determined whether or not the input timing pattern E (see FIG. 37 (A)) or the input timing pattern F. If the determination result in step S202 is YES, the process proceeds to step S203, and it is determined whether or not it is the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal based on the determined input timing pattern. If it is not the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal (NO in S203), the process returns to step S203 and the process of step S203 is repeated until the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal is reached. In this way, when the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal is reached (YES in S203), the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the setting key cylinder signal (S204), and proceeds to step S205.

In step S205, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch signal is input timing based on the determined input timing pattern. If it is not the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal (NO in S205), the process returns to step S205 and the process of step S205 is repeated until the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal is reached. In this way, when the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal is reached (YES in S205), the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the RAM clear switch signal (S206), and the process ends.

If NO is determined in step S202, the process proceeds to step S207. In step S207, it is determined whether or not the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal is earlier than the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal in the determined input timing pattern. That is, it is determined whether or not the input timing pattern G (see FIG. 37 (A)) or the input timing pattern H. If the determination result in step S207 is YES, the process proceeds to step S208, and it is determined whether or not it is the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal based on the determined input timing pattern. If it is not the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal (NO in S208), the process returns to step S208 and the process of step S208 is repeated until the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal is reached. In this way, when the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal is reached (YES in S208), the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the RAM clear switch signal (S209), and proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, it is determined whether or not it is the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal based on the determined input timing pattern. If it is not the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal (NO in S210), the process returns to step S210 and the process of step S210 is repeated until the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal is reached. In this way, when the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal is reached (YES in S210), the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the setting key cylinder signal (S211), and the process ends.

If NO is determined in step S207, the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal and the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal are the same in the determined input timing pattern. That is, it is an input timing pattern A (see FIG. 37 (A)), an input timing pattern B, an input timing pattern C, or an input timing pattern D. In this case, the process proceeds to step S212, and it is determined whether or not it is the input timing of the setting key Linda signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal. If it is not these input timings (NO in S212), the process returns to step S212 again, and the process of step S212 is repeated until the input timing of the setting key Linda signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal are reached. In this way, when the input timing of the setting key Linda signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal are reached (YES in S212), the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the setting key cylinder signal and the RAM clear switch signal (S213). Finish the process.

[Process at power-on] Return to the description of the process after step S011 shown in FIG. After the transition signal input process (S011) described above, in step S011, the RAM clear switch 191 is ON (ON state) (pressed operation is performed), and the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON (ON state). Whether or not it is determined (S011). That is, it is determined whether or not the level of the input RAM clear switch signal is the "H" level and the level of the input setting key cylinder signal is the "H" level. If the determination result in step S011 is YES, it means that the setting change mode transition operation has been executed, and the process proceeds to step S013 through the setting change mode process (S012) described later.

On the other hand, if the determination result in step S011 is NO, it is subsequently determined whether or not the set value information is stored in the set value information storage unit 107 (S016). If the set value information is not stored (NO in S016), it means that the set value has never been set, and the process proceeds to the error mode processing (S021) described later. On the other hand, if the set value information is stored (YES in S016), then it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is ON (S017). In short, the process of step S017 is a process of determining whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, although the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. If the RAM clear switch 191 is ON (YES in S017), the process proceeds to step S013.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 191 is not ON (NO in S017), it is subsequently determined whether or not the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON (S018). In short, the process of step S018 is a process of determining whether or not the setting key cylinder 180 is in the rotation position, although the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. If the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON (YES in S018), the setting value confirmation mode process described later is executed (S019), and the process proceeds to step S020. On the other hand, if the setting key cylinder switch 180a is not ON (NO in S018), the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed and the setting key cylinder 180 is not in the rotation position when the power is turned on. In this case, the process proceeds to step S020 without executing the setting confirmation mode process in step S019. When the process proceeds to step S020, the power failure recovery process described later is executed, and the process proceeds to step S022.

In step S013, the information stored in the gaming RAM 104 is cleared (S013). However, at this time, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 and the information related to the base stored in the base information storage unit 108 (information on the total number of launched balls, information on the total number of prize balls, 1). Information on the previous round, information on the previous round, information on the previous round, and information on the previous round) will not be cleared.

In this way, even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on, the set value information is not cleared, so that the game can be restarted with the set value set before the power failure. That is, it is possible to play a game without shifting to the setting change mode and setting the set value each time the power is turned on. In addition, even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on, the information related to the base is not cleared, so that the 7-segment display 300 has the same current base as before the power failure, 1 time before base, and 2 times before. It is possible to display the base and the base three times before.

When performing the setting change mode transition operation, YES is determined in step S011 and the process proceeds to step S012. In this case, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 in step S013 is not cleared unless the setting change mode process of step S012 is completed. In short, when the setting change mode transition operation is performed, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 can be cleared after the setting change mode is completed. On the other hand, if the setting key cylinder 180 is not in the rotation position when the power is turned on, but the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, YES is determined in step S017, and the process proceeds to step S013. Become. In this case, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 can be cleared immediately after the power is turned on.

After step S013, the game control microcomputer 101 initially sets the work area of the game RAM 104 (S014). In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the game ROM 103 is set in the work area of the game RAM 104. Subsequently, a RAM clear notification command for notifying the clearing of the stored contents of the game RAM 104 is transmitted to the effect control board 120 (S015), and the process proceeds to step S022. In step S022, as other power-on processing, for example, the setting of the gaming CPU 102, the setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), and the like are performed, and this processing is completed.

[Setting change mode processing] As shown in FIG. 41, in the setting change mode processing (S012), the game control microcomputer 101 first sets the effect control board 120 to notify the transition to the setting change mode. Send a mode transition command (S030). Then, it is determined whether or not the set value information is stored in the set value information storage unit 107 (S031). If the set value information is stored (YES in S031), the set value is set before the power failure, so the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 based on the set value information (S032) (Fig.). 26 (B)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits serial data for displaying the set value from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27) to the LED driver 350. In this way, the setting changer can grasp the setting value set before the power failure on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after performing the setting change mode transition operation.

In step S033, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed in the setting change mode. If it is ON (YES in S033), new set value information is stored in the set value information storage unit 107 in order to advance the set value by one (S034). When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the set value is "6", the set value information indicating that the set value is "1" is stored. Subsequently, the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 based on the new set value information (S035) (see FIGS. 26 (C) and 26 (D)). This makes it possible for the person who changes the setting to know that the set value has been moved up.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a setting value change command for notifying the effect control board 120 that the setting value has been changed (S036), and the setting value moved up by one. Send the setting value specification command for notifying the information (setting value information) (S037), and proceed to step S038. In step S038, it is determined whether or not the setting key cylinder switch 180a is OFF. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation operation has been performed. If it is not OFF (NO in S038), it is not the timing to end the setting change mode yet, so the process returns to step S033. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S038), the setting value specification command (confirmed setting information) for notifying the confirmed setting value information (setting value information) is transmitted to the effect control board 120 (determined setting information). S039). Then, a setting mode end command for notifying the end of the setting change mode is transmitted to the effect control board 120 (S040). Further, the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 is set to a non-display mode (S041), and the process proceeds to step S013 (see FIG. 39) described above. In this way, as soon as the setting key cylinder switch 180a is turned off, the set value becomes invisible on the 7-segment display 300, and it is possible to make it difficult for the surroundings to grasp the fixed set value. Since the processing after step S013 is described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, there are a total of three timings for transmitting the set value designation command including the set value information to the effect control board 120. The first timing is the timing at which the set value designation command is transmitted by the process of step S010 when the power is turned on. The second timing is the timing at which the setting value designation command is transmitted by the process of step S037 when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode. The third timing is the timing at which the setting value designation command is transmitted by the process of step S039 when the setting value is confirmed with the end of the setting change mode.

In this way, by limiting the timing at which the setting value designation command is transmitted to only three, it is possible to reduce the risk of illegal acquisition of the setting value information to the outside as much as possible. That is, the above-mentioned first timing, second timing, and third timing are from the time the power is turned on until the processing related to the game (game control processing from step S101 to step S106 shown in FIG. 45) is started. It occurs in a short period of time, and it does not occur after the game is started. In this way, the set value specification command is not transmitted from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120 during business hours (mainly during the game), and the set value is illegally grasped by skimming for the set value specification command. It is possible to reduce the risk of being killed as much as possible.

[Set value confirmation mode processing] As shown in FIG. 42, in the setting value confirmation mode processing (S019), the game control microcomputer 101 first displays the set value on the 7-segment display 300 based on the set value information ( S050). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the set value is started on the 7-segment display 300. If it has not elapsed (NO in S051), the process of step S051 is repeated, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 300 continues. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S051), the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 is set to a non-display mode (S052), and step S020 described later (see the process at the time of power failure recovery in FIG. 39). ). As described above, in the setting value confirmation mode processing (S019), unlike the setting change mode processing (S012) described above, the setting value is not changed and the current setting value is simply displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Only.

[Process at the time of restoration at the time of power failure] As shown in FIG. 43, in the processing at the time of recovery of power failure (S020), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the power failure flag is ON (S060). The power-off flag is a flag indicating the occurrence of a power-off, and is a flag that is turned on in the power-off monitoring process (see FIG. 49) described later. If the power off flag is not ON (NO in S060), the power may not be cut off normally, so the process proceeds to step S065.

On the other hand, if the power off flag is ON (YES in S060), the checksum of the game RAM 104 is calculated (S061), and the checksum of the game RAM 104 stored (stored) at the time of power failure (S). It is determined whether or not it matches with step S161 in FIG. 49 (S062). If the values of these checksums do not match (NO in S062), it is determined that the stored contents of the gaming RAM 104 are abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S065. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S062), it is determined that the stored contents of the game RAM 104 are normal, and the process proceeds to step S063.

In step S063, the setting management of the work area of the game RAM 104 at the time of power recovery is performed. In this setting process, the power recovery information is read from the game ROM 103, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the game RAM 104. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the power off flag (S064), and proceeds to the above-mentioned step S022 (see FIG. 39). Since the processing after step S022 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in step S065, the information stored in the gaming RAM 104 is cleared. At this time, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 and the information related to the base stored in the base information storage unit 108 (information on the total number of fired balls, information on the total number of prize balls, once). Pre-based information, 2 pre-based information, 3 pre-based information) is not cleared. However, when proceeding to step S065, there is a possibility that the power is not cut off normally, or there is a possibility that the stored contents of the game RAM 104 are abnormal because the checksum values do not match. .. Therefore, instead of the process of step S065, the set value information and the information related to the base may be cleared. In this case, after clearing the set value information, the set value information indicating, for example, "1" may be newly stored in the set value information storage unit 107 as the set value of the initial value. In the process of step S065, if the power off flag set in the gaming RAM 104 is ON, the power off flag is turned off.

After step S065, the work area of the gaming RAM 104 is initially set (S066). In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the game ROM 103 is set in the work area of the game RAM 104. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a RAM clear notification command for notifying the effect control board 120 that the stored contents of the game RAM 104 are cleared (S067), and the above-mentioned step S022 (see FIG. 39). ).

[Error Mode Processing] As shown in FIG. 44, in the error mode processing (S021), the game control microcomputer 101 first "E" in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 (FIG. 30 (A)). Executes error display processing to indicate the characters (see) (S080). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits serial data for indicating the character "E" from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27) to the LED driver 350. As a result, in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, light is emitted in an error lighting mode so as to represent the character "E". In this way, it is possible to make the employees of the amusement park understand the transition to the error mode by showing the character "E" on the 7-segment display 300.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits an error command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the transition to the error mode (S081). After that, the loop processing is performed without returning to the power-on processing (S001, see FIG. 38). In this way, when the mode shifts to the error mode, the error mode continues until the power is cut off. Therefore, the game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is set when the power is turned on next time and the set value is set.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing] The game control microcomputer 101 repeats the main-side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 45 every short time, for example, 4 msec. First, the game control microcomputer 101 determines a jackpot random number used for the jackpot lottery, a hit type random number for determining the jackpot type, a reach random number for determining whether or not to reach the reach state in the effect symbol variation effect, and a variation pattern. Random number update processing is performed to update the fluctuation pattern random number, the normal symbol random number (winning random number) used for the normal symbol lottery, and the like (S101). At least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like. If all random numbers are hardware random numbers, software does not need to update the random numbers. Further, the random number generation circuit may be built in the game control microcomputer 101.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs an input process (S102). In the input process (S102), various sensors (first start port sensor 11a, second start port sensor 12a, gate sensor 13a, large winning opening sensor 14a, general winning opening sensor 10a) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. , The detection signal detected by the outlet sensor 18a (see FIG. 6) is read, and the prize ball command for paying out the prize ball according to the type of the winning port is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 170.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a start port sensor detection process (S103), a special operation process (S104), and a normal operation process (S105). In the start port sensor detection process (S103), if there is a prize detection by the first start port sensor 11a or the second start port sensor 12a, it is determined that there are less than four hold memories corresponding to the start ports where the prize is detected. Random numbers such as jackpot random numbers (big hit random numbers, hit type random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers (see FIG. 15A)) are acquired as conditions. Further, if the passage is detected by the gate sensor 13a, a normal symbol random number (see FIG. 15 (B)) is acquired on condition that the number of reserved figures is less than four.

In the special operation process (S104), the jackpot determination table (see FIGS. 16A to 16F) based on the set value indicated by the set value information is the random number such as the jackpot random number acquired in the start port sensor detection process (S103). ), The hit type determination table (see FIG. 14), the reach determination table (see FIG. 17 (A)), and the special figure variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 18). The jackpot determination process for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot using the jackpot determination tables shown in FIGS. 16A to 16F corresponds to "determination processing performed based on the entry of a ball into the entrance." Then, a special symbol (variable display and stop display) for showing the result of the big hit lottery is displayed. When starting the variation display of the special symbol, a variation start command including information on the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Further, when starting the stop display of the special symbol, the variable stop command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. As a result of the judgment of the jackpot random number, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot game (special) in which the jackpot 14 is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern (opening time and number of opening times, see FIG. 14) according to the type of jackpot. Play a game). In the execution of this jackpot game, when the opening is started, an opening command including information on the type of the winning jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. When starting a round game, a round designation command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. When starting the ending, the ending command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Further, in the special operation process (S104), when the game state is changed, the game state specification command including the game state information is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Further, in the special operation process (S104), when the random number such as the jackpot random number is not stored, the customer waiting command for executing the customer waiting effect is set in the effect control microcomputer 121.

In the normal operation process (S105), the normal symbol random number acquired in the start port sensor detection process (S103) and the normal symbol hit detection table (see FIG. 17B) are used for judgment, and the normal symbol variation pattern selection table is used. (See FIG. 17 (C)) is used to select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol according to the gaming state. Then, the normal symbol is displayed (variable display and stop display) for notifying the determination result of the general drawing lottery. As a result of the judgment of the normal symbol random number, if the normal winning symbol is won, the auxiliary game of opening the electric chew 12D according to a predetermined opening pattern (opening time and number of opening times, see FIG. 19) according to the game state is performed. conduct.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs an output process of outputting the command or the like set in each of the above processes to the effect control board 120 or the like (S106). Then, the base calculation process (S107), the base display process (S108), and the power failure monitoring process (S109), which will be described later, are executed to complete this process.

[Base Calculation Process] As shown in FIG. 46, in the base calculation processing (S107), the game control microcomputer 101 first executes a launch ball number counting process (S110). In the launch ball count process (S110), the value of the launch ball counter provided in the gaming RAM 104 is increased based on the detection signal from the ejection port sensor 18a. However, in this embodiment, since the base is calculated in the normal gaming state, the value of the number of shot balls counter is increased only in the normal gaming state. Next, it is determined whether or not the number of launched balls is a multiple of 10000, that is, whether or not the value of the number of launched balls counter is a multiple of 10000 such as 10000, 20000, 30000, 40,000, 50000, 60000 (S111). ). If it is not a multiple of 10000 shots (NO in S111), the process proceeds to step S113. On the other hand, if it is a multiple of 10,000 shots (YES in S111), a setting suggestion condition establishment command for notifying the effect control microcomputer 121 that the number of shot balls has become a multiple of 10,000 shots is set in the gaming RAM 104. (S112).

Subsequently, in step S113, the total prize ball number counting process is executed. In the total prize ball number counting process (S113), the game RAM 104 is provided based on the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 11a, the second starting port sensor 12a, the large winning opening sensor 14a, and the general winning opening sensor 10a. The value of the total number of prize balls counter is increased by the value according to the number of prize balls. However, in this embodiment, since the base is calculated in the normal gaming state, the value of the total prize ball counter is increased by the value corresponding to the number of prize balls only in the normal gaming state. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls for winning the first starting port 11 is "3", the number of winning balls for winning the second starting port 12 is "1", and the number of winning balls for winning the large winning opening is "1". 10 ”, and the number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 10 is“ 5 ”, but the number of these prize balls can be changed as appropriate.

Then, the current base arithmetic processing is executed (S114). In the current base calculation process (S114), the current base (%) is calculated by dividing the value of the total prize ball counter by the value of the launch ball counter and multiplying by 100. Then, the calculated current base information (current base information) is stored in the base information storage unit 108.

After step S114, it is determined whether or not the number of launched balls has reached 60,000, that is, whether or not the value of the number of launched balls counter is 60,000 or more (S115). If the number of shots has not reached 60,000 (NO in S115), this process ends. On the other hand, if the number of shots reaches 60,000 (YES in S115), the base information stored in the base information storage unit 108 is shifted and stored (S116).

Specifically, if the information of the third pre-base information (three-time pre-base information) is stored, the third pre-base information is cleared. Further, if the information of the two-time pre-base (two-time pre-base information) is stored, the two-time pre-base information is stored as the three-time pre-base information. Further, if the information of the one-time pre-base (one-time pre-base information) is stored, the one-time pre-base information is stored as the two-time pre-base information. Further, the current base information (current base information) is stored as the previous base information.

After step S116, the value of the number of shot balls counter is cleared (S117), the value of the total number of prize balls counter is cleared (S118), and this process is completed. In this way, every time the number of launched balls reaches 60,000, the number of launched balls and the total number of prize balls are reset, and the current base calculation is performed.

[Base display process] As shown in FIG. 47, in the base display process (S108), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the initial display end flag is ON (S120). The initial display flag is a flag indicating that the initial display on the 7-segment display 300 has been completed. If the initial display end flag is not ON (NO in S120), the 7-segment display 300 executes the initial display process for executing the initial display (S121). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits serial data for lighting all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 of the 7-segment display 300 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27) to the LED driver 350. .. In this way, as shown in FIG. 26 (F), by executing the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, it is confirmed that the 7-segment display 300 itself is not malfunctioning, malfunctioning, or improperly modified. It is possible.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the initial display was started on the 7-segment display 300 (S122). If it has not passed (NO in S122), this process is terminated in order to continue the initial display on the 7-segment display 300. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S122), it is the timing to end the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, and the base display flag is currently turned ON (S123). The current base display flag is a flag indicating that the current base is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. After step S123, the initial display end flag is turned ON (S124) to end this process.

If the initial display flag is ON in step S120 (YES in S120), the process proceeds to step S125 to determine whether or not the base display flag is currently ON (S125). If the current base display flag is ON (YES in S125), the current base display process for displaying the current base is executed on the 7-segment display 300 (S126). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "bL." In the lighting mode in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27), and displays the third display. Serial data for displaying the current base in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. In this way, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the base can be grasped by the 7-segment display 300 at present, and it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a failure, a malfunction, or an unauthorized modification. It is possible.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the current base display was started on the 7-segment display 300 (S127). If it has not passed (NO in S127), this process is terminated in order to continue the display of the current base on the 7-segment display 300. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S127), it is the timing to end the display of the current base on the 7-segment display 300, and the previous base display flag is turned ON (S128). The one-time previous base display flag is a flag indicating that the display timing of the one-time previous base has been reached. After step S128, the current base display flag is turned off (S129), and this process ends.

If the base display flag is not currently ON in step S125 (NO in S125), the process proceeds to step S130 shown in FIG. 48, and it is determined whether or not the previous base display flag is ON. If the previous base display flag is ON (YES in S130), it is subsequently determined whether or not the base information storage unit 108 stores the previous base information (S131). If there is a memory (YES in S131), the one-time pre-base display process for displaying the one-time pre-base is executed on the 7-segment display 300 (S132). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "b1." In the lighting mode in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27), and displays the third display. Serial data for displaying the previous base once in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. In this way, with the 7-segment display 300, not only the current base but also the previous base can be grasped as shown in FIG. 31 (C), and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a failure, malfunction, or unauthorized modification. It is possible to more accurately determine whether or not it has been applied.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S131 that the previous base information is not stored (NO in S131), the one-time previous base non-display process is executed (S134). In this one-time pre-base non-display process (S134), the game control microcomputer 101 blinks from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27) in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320. "." Is displayed, and serial data for displaying "---" in the lighting mode in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32 (C), the 7-segment display 300 cannot yet grasp the previous base once.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the one-time pre-base display process (S132) or the one-time pre-base non-display process (S134) (S135). ). If it has not elapsed (NO in S135), this process is terminated in order to continue the one-time pre-base display process (S132) or the one-time pre-base non-display process (S134). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S135), the previous base display flag is turned ON twice (S136). The 2nd previous base display flag is a flag indicating that the display timing of the 2nd previous base has been reached. After step S136, the previous base display flag is turned off (S137), and this process is completed.

If the previous base display flag is not ON in step S130 (NO in S130), the process proceeds to step S138 to determine whether or not the previous base display flag is ON. If the two-time previous base display flag is ON (YES in S138), it is subsequently determined whether or not the base information storage unit 108 stores the two-time previous base information (S139). If there is a memory (YES in S139), the two-time pre-base display process for displaying the two-time pre-base is executed on the 7-segment display 300 (S140). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "b2." In the lighting mode in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27), and displays the third display. Serial data for displaying the previous base twice in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. In this way, with the 7-segment display 300, not only the current base and the one-time front base but also the two-time front base can be grasped, and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a failure or malfunction. Alternatively, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not an unauthorized modification has been performed.

On the other hand, in step S139, if it is determined that the previous base information is not stored twice (NO in S139), the two-time previous base non-display process is executed (S141). In this two-time pre-base non-display process (S141), the game control microcomputer 101 blinks from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27) in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320. "." Is displayed, and serial data for displaying "---" in the lighting mode in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32 (D), the 7-segment display 300 cannot yet grasp the previous base twice.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the two-time pre-base display process (S140) or the two-time pre-base non-display process (S141) (S142). ). If it has not elapsed (NO in S142), this process is terminated in order to continue the two-time pre-base display process (S140) or the two-time pre-base non-display process (S141). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S142), turn on the base display flag three times before (S143). The 3 times before base display flag is a flag indicating that the display timing of the 3 times before base has been reached. After step S143, the previous base display flag is turned off twice (S144), and this process is completed.

If the 2nd previous base display flag is not ON in step S138 (NO in S138), the process proceeds to step S145 to determine whether or not the 3rd previous base display flag is ON. It should be noted that in step S145, it is not substantially determined that the three-time previous base display flag is not ON. That is, when the process proceeds to step S145, the base display flag three times before is ON, so the process always proceeds to step S146. In step S146, it is determined whether or not the base information storage unit 108 stores the previous base information three times. If there is a memory (YES in S146), the 7-segment display 300 executes the 3 times previous base display process for displaying the 3 times previous base (S147). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "b3." In the lighting mode in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27), and displays the third display. Serial data for displaying the previous base three times in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. In this way, with the 7-segment display 300, not only the current base, the one-time front base, and the two-time front base, but also the three-time front base can be grasped as shown in FIG. 31 (E), and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be grasped. It is possible to more accurately determine whether or not a malfunction, malfunction, or unauthorized modification has been performed.

On the other hand, in step S146, if it is determined that the three-time previous base information is not stored (NO in S146), the three-time previous base non-display process is executed (S148). In this three-time pre-base non-display process (S148), the game control microcomputer 101 blinks from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27) in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320. "." Is displayed, and serial data for displaying "---" in the lighting mode in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32 (E), the 7-segment display 300 still cannot grasp the previous base three times.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the three-time previous base display process (S147) or the three-time previous base non-display process (S148) (S149). ). If it has not elapsed (NO in S149), this process is terminated in order to continue the three-time previous base display process (S147) or the three-time previous base non-display process (S148). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S149), the current base display flag is turned ON (S150). As a result, in the next base display process (S108), the display of the current base is started on the 7-segment display 300. After step S150, the previous base display flag is turned off three times (S151), and this process is completed.

[Power Off Monitoring Process] In the power off monitoring process (S109), as shown in FIG. 49, the game control microcomputer 101 must first determine whether or not a power off signal has been input (S160), and has not input it. If (NO in S160), this process is completed. The power supply cutoff signal is a signal output from the power supply unit 190 when the voltage of the monitored power supply (for example, DC24V) is not detected for a predetermined period (for example, 25 ms). If there is a power off signal input (YES in S160), the checksum is calculated and stored in the game RAM 104 (S161), and the power off flag is turned on (S162). Then, the access prohibition setting to the game RAM 104 is set (S163). This makes it impossible to write or read information to the gaming RAM 104. After that, loop processing is performed without returning to the main timer interrupt processing (S005, see FIG. 45).

13. Direction mode and special opening effect Next, the effect mode and special opening effect will be described. In this embodiment, the effect mode is set corresponding to each of the gaming states. The effect mode is a mode of effect in the image display device 50. If the effect mode is different, the image displayed on the image display device 50 is different, such as different characters, items, and background images appearing, and the variable effect is also executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode. In this embodiment, there are a day mode corresponding to a low-probability non-time saving state (normal game state), a night mode corresponding to a high-probability time-saving state, and a space mode corresponding to a low-probability time-saving state.

When the daytime mode is set, as shown in FIG. 50A, the daytime background image Ha indicating the daytime is displayed on the display screen 50a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who sees the daytime background image Ha recognize that the player is controlled to the low probability non-time saving state (normal game state). When the state shifts from the low probability time saving state to the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), a left-handed image La for prompting left-handed is displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen 50a for a predetermined time. .. By displaying this left-handed image La, the player can grasp that the right-handed image is returned to the left-handed image.

When the night mode is set, as shown in FIG. 50B, the night background image Hb indicating the night is displayed on the display screen 50a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who sees the night background image Hb recognize that the control is performed in a highly accurate time saving state. Further, during the setting of the night mode, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the right-handed image Ra for prompting right-handed is continuously displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 50a. By displaying the right-handed image Ra, the player can grasp the situation to be right-handed and aim to enter the electric chew 12D (second starting port 12).

When the space mode is set, as shown in FIG. 50C, a space background image Hc showing the universe is displayed on the display screen 50a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who sees the space background image Hc recognize that the time is controlled with high accuracy. Further, during the setting of the night mode, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the right-handed image Ra for prompting right-handed is continuously displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 50a. By displaying the right-handed image Ra, the player can grasp the situation in which the right-handed image should be hit and aim to enter the electric chew 12D.

By the way, in this embodiment, as the opening effect executed in the opening of the jackpot game, the special opening effect shown in FIG. 51 (B) can be executed in addition to the normal opening effect shown in FIG. 51 (A). .. In the normal opening effect, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), a normal opening image TP showing the appearance of the main character of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the characters “SUPERBONUS” is displayed on the display screen 50a. This normal opening effect is generally executed as an opening effect, unlike the special opening effect described later.

On the other hand, in the special opening effect, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the main character of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is awakened and the characters "Awakening BONUS" are shown on the display screen 50a. The opening image KP is displayed. This special opening effect is executed only when the following two conditions are satisfied.

That is, first, as the first condition, it is necessary that the set value is changed in the setting change mode when the power is turned on. That is, it is necessary that an employee of the amusement park or the like presses the RAM clear switch 191 in the setting change mode when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on to change the set value. Next, as a second condition, between the transition to the normal gaming state and the execution of the variable display of the special symbol 30 times (from the control to the second gaming state to a predetermined time point), the special symbol It is necessary to win a big hit in the lottery (a predetermined specific condition is satisfied). That is, it is necessary to draw a big hit by the time the special symbol lottery is executed 30 times after shifting from the low probability time saving state to the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player. Only when the above two conditions are satisfied, the special opening effect is executed instead of the normal opening effect.

Here, the meaning of the special opening production will be explained. As described above, the special opening effect can be executed only when the set value is changed in the setting change mode at the time of turning on the power. Therefore, the special opening effect can be said to be a setting change suggestion that suggests that the set value has been changed to the player. It should be noted that the special opening effect only suggests that the set value has been changed, and does not suggest a specific value of the set value.

By the way, in general, in a pachinko gaming machine in which a set value can be set, a set value having the lowest jackpot determination probability (for example, a set value from "1" to "6") among a plurality of set values (for example, a set value from "1" to "6"). It is often set to "1"). That is, in the pachinko gaming machines installed in the amusement park, a setting value with a relatively high jackpot determination probability may be set, but in most pachinko gaming machines, the lowest setting value is set. There is a fact that there is. Therefore, most players often play the game on the assumption that the lowest setting value (“1”) will be set.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode when the power is turned on, a special opening effect can be executed as the opening effect. This makes it possible for the player to know that the set value has been changed. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has the set value changed from the lowest set value (“1”), and it is possible to arouse the motivation to play. In addition, it is possible to make people interested in which setting value has been changed from the lowest setting value, and it is possible to improve the motivation for playing.

Further, as described above, in order for the special opening effect to be executed, after shifting from the low probability time saving state (first game state) to the normal game state (second game state), the variation display of the special symbol is displayed 30 times. It is necessary to win the jackpot before it is executed. Therefore, from the player's point of view, even after shifting to the disadvantageous normal gaming state, until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 30 times in order to confirm whether the set value has been changed. In addition, I feel like I've got a big hit. In this way, even after shifting from the low probability time saving state to the disadvantageous normal gaming state, it is possible to arouse the willingness to win the jackpot and suppress the decrease in the willingness to play.

Also, in general, a player often cancels a game when he / she shifts to a disadvantageous normal game state. Therefore, on the next day after the business hours are over, there are many pachinko gaming machines in which the game is played from the state after the transition to the normal gaming state. Here, the change of the set value is generally performed before the business start time (9:00) of the amusement park. Therefore, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the player positively tries to play the game from the state after the transition to the normal gaming state immediately after the business start time of the game hall. This is because it is possible to confirm whether or not the special opening effect is executed by drawing a big hit between the transition to the normal gaming state and the execution of the variable display of the special symbol 30 times. At this time, if the jackpot is assigned and the special opening effect is executed, the player can grasp the situation where the set value has been changed and expect the change to a relatively high set value. In addition, even if the special opening effect is not executed, the player can grasp the situation where the set value has not been changed, and by referring to the game data of the previous day, it is easier to guess the set value at the present time. Become. From the above, with this pachinko gaming machine PY1, it is possible to have the player actively play the game from the state after the transition to the normal gaming state immediately after the business start time of the game hall. It is possible to increase the operation immediately after the start time.

14. Special customer waiting production Next, the special customer waiting production will be described. In the present embodiment, as the customer waiting effect, in addition to the normal customer waiting effect shown in FIG. 52, the special customer waiting effect shown in FIG. 53 can be executed. The customer waiting effect is an effect indicating that the game is not executed on the display screen 50a when the variable effect is not executed because there is no special drawing hold. The normal customer waiting effect is generally executed as a customer waiting effect, unlike the special customer waiting effect described later.

Specifically, when the normal customer waiting effect is started, as shown in FIG. 52, (A) normal standby image TT1 ⇒ (B) selection standby image SM1 ⇒ (C) hole code compatible image HK1 ⇒ newly registered image ST1 ⇒In the order of the normal demo image TD1, each standby image is displayed on the display screen 50a with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 52 (A), the normal standby image TT1 is a standby image showing that the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. In other words, the state in which the staging symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are still displayed is the normal standby image TT1. The normal standby image TT1 is displayed only during the first waiting time (60 seconds in this embodiment) after the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed (after the normal customer waiting effect is started). Then, when the first first standby time elapses, the selection standby image SM1 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 52B, the selection standby image SM1 shifts to an image for using the mobile terminal linkage function by pressing the up direction button or the down direction button of the select button 42k. Is. The mobile terminal linkage function allows you to see effects that cannot be seen in the initial settings of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 by using the pachinko gaming machine PY1 in conjunction with a mobile terminal (for example, a mobile phone). This is a function that allows you to view the game history, etc. The selection standby image SM1 is also a standby image showing that the set volume can be changed by pressing the left-direction button or the right-direction button of the select button 42k. In the selection standby image SM1, the stop-displayed effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are also displayed. The selection standby image SM1 is displayed during the second standby time (30 seconds in this embodiment) unless the select button 42k is pressed. Then, when the second waiting time elapses, the hole code corresponding image HK1 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 52 (C), the hall code corresponding image HK1 is a standby image showing the main character of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the name of the game hall corresponding to the hall code information. The hole code corresponding image HK1 is displayed only during the third standby image (30 seconds in this embodiment). Then, when the third waiting time elapses, the newly registered image ST1 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 52 (D), the newly registered image ST1 is a standby image for encouraging new registration for using the mobile terminal linkage function. In this newly registered image ST1, a two-dimensional code is displayed on the right side. Therefore, if the displayed two-dimensional code is read by the mobile terminal, the Internet site showing the related information of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be immediately accessed. Then, if you enter the necessary information on the Internet site, you can complete the new registration. If the new registration is not completed, the password will not be issued on the Internet site showing the related information of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The newly registered image ST1 is displayed only during the fourth standby time (30 seconds in this embodiment). Then, when the fourth standby time elapses, the normal demo image TD1 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 52 (E), the normal demo image TD1 (normal customer waiting image) is a standby image showing a battle between the main character of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and a normal enemy character. The normal demo image TD1 is displayed only during the fifth standby time (30 seconds in this embodiment). Then, when the fifth standby time elapses, the selection standby image SM1 shown in FIG. 52 (B) is displayed. That is, when the variable effect is completed and the normal customer waiting effect is started, (A) normal standby image TT1 ⇒ (B) selected standby image SM1 ⇒ (C) hole code compatible image HK1 ⇒ (D) in the first lap. Newly registered image ST1⇒ (E) Normal demo image TD1 is displayed, and after the second lap, (B) Selection standby image SM1⇒ (C) Hall code compatible image HK1⇒ (D) Newly registered image ST1⇒ (E) Normally, the demo image TD1 will be displayed.

Subsequently, the special customer waiting effect will be described with reference to FIG. 53. When the special customer waiting effect is started, as shown in FIG. 53, (A) normal standby image TT1 ⇒ (B) selection standby image SM1 ⇒ (C) hole code compatible image HK1 ⇒ newly registered image ST1 ⇒ special demo image In the order of TD2, each standby image is displayed on the display screen 50a with the passage of time. That is, the special customer waiting effect and the normal customer waiting effect differ only from the special demo image TD2 shown in FIG. 53 (E) and the normal demo image TD1 shown in FIG. 52 (E). The special demo image TD2 (special customer waiting image) is a standby image showing a battle between the main character of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and a special enemy character, as shown in FIG. 53 (D).

By the way, the special customer waiting effect is executed only when the following three conditions are satisfied. That is, first, as the first condition, it is necessary that the set value is changed in the setting change mode when the power is turned on. That is, it is necessary that an employee of the amusement park or the like presses the RAM clear switch 191 in the setting change mode when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on to change the set value. Next, as a second condition, it is necessary that the game has not started yet after the power is turned on. That is, in the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting effect (customer waiting effect before the game) in which the variation display of the special symbol has never started (the game has not started) after the power is turned on, and the customer waiting effect after the power is turned on. There is a customer waiting effect (after the game is started) after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the game is started), and it is necessary to have a customer waiting effect where the game is not started after the power is turned on. Is. Finally, as a third condition, it is necessary to decide to execute the special customer waiting effect by lottery. Only when the above three conditions are satisfied, the special customer waiting effect is executed instead of the normal customer waiting effect.

Here, the meaning of the special customer waiting production will be explained. As described above, the special customer waiting effect can be executed only when the set value is changed in the setting change mode at the time of turning on the power. The display of the special demo image TD2 (see FIG. 53 (E)) and the display of the normal demo image TD1 (see FIG. 52 (E)) are different between the special customer waiting effect and the normal customer waiting effect. , The display of the special demo image TD2 can be said to indicate to the player that the set value has been changed. The display of the special demo image TD2 only suggests that the set value has been changed, and does not suggest a specific value of the set value.

Further, as described above, there is a fact that the lowest setting value is set in most pachinko gaming machines among the pachinko gaming machines in which the setting value can be set. Therefore, most players often play the game on the assumption that the lowest setting value (“1”) will be set. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the special customer waiting effect can be executed as the customer waiting effect. As a result, the player who sees the special demo image TD2 instead of the normal demo image TD1 can be made to understand that it is the pachinko gaming machine PY1 whose set value has been changed. As a result, it is possible to make a player who is looking for a pachinko gaming machine to play a game think that it is a pachinko gaming machine PY1 whose setting value has been changed from the lowest setting value (“1”). It is possible to motivate. In addition, it is possible to attract more interest in the game by making people interested in which setting value has been changed from the lowest setting value.

Further, as described above, the special customer waiting effect (display of the special demo image TD2) can be executed only when the game is not yet started after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible for the player to pay a great deal of attention to the game on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 immediately after the opening time (9:00) of the game hall. That is, the change of the set value is generally performed before the business start time (9:00) of the amusement park. Then, if it is the business start time of the game hall, the game is not yet performed by the player after the power is turned on (the change display of the special symbol has not been started even once). Therefore, immediately after the opening time of the amusement park, it is easy to confirm whether or not the special customer waiting effect is executed, and as the time elapses, the game is started and it is difficult to confirm whether or not the special customer waiting effect is executed. Become. In this way, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the player tries to positively confirm whether or not the special customer waiting effect is executed (display of the special demo image TD2) immediately after the opening time of the game hall. At this time, if the special demo image TD2 can be grasped, the player can grasp the situation where the set value has been changed and expect the change to a relatively high set value. From the above, among the many pachinko gaming machines installed in the amusement park, it is possible to make the player want to play a game with this pachinko gaming machine PY1 immediately after the opening time of the business. It is possible to increase the operation immediately after.

In this embodiment, the special customer waiting effect (display of the special demo image TD2) is determined to execute the special customer waiting effect by lottery even if the above-mentioned first condition and the second condition are satisfied (special described later). Unless the customer waiting effect pattern is determined), it will not be executed. In other words, even if the setting value is changed in the setting change mode when the power is turned on and the customer waiting effect is not played yet, the special customer waiting effect is not always executed, and the normal customer is not always executed. A waiting effect may be executed. This gives the player the possibility that it may be a pachinko gaming machine whose set value has been changed, even if the execution of the special customer waiting effect cannot be grasped immediately after the business start time. This is because it can be done.

15. Operation of the Staging Control Microcomputer Next, the operation of the staging control microcomputer 121 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 66.

[Sub-control main process] The effect control microcomputer 121 provided on the effect control board 120 reads and executes the program of the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 54 from the effect ROM 123 when the power is turned on. The counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. that appear in the operation description of the staging control microcomputer 121 are provided in the staging RAM 124.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the sub-control main process, it is determined whether or not the sub-side power cutoff flag (flag turned on at the time of power cutoff) is ON and the content of the staging RAM 124 is normal (S1001). If the determination result is NO, that is, if the sub-side power-off flag is not ON, or if the contents of the production RAM 124 are not normal even if the sub-side power-off flag is ON, the production RAM 124 Initialize (S1002) and proceed to step S1003.

On the other hand, if the determination result in step S1001 is YES, that is, if the sub-side power cutoff flag is turned on due to the power failure, but the contents of the effect RAM 124 are kept normal, then the RAM is cleared. Determine if a notification command has been received (S1011). If the RAM clear notification command has been received (YES in S1011), the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 has been cleared. Therefore, the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 is cleared (S1002), and the process proceeds to step S1003. On the other hand, if the RAM clear notification command has not been received (NO in S1011), the process proceeds to step S1003 without clearing the effect RAM 124.

Here, in the process of step S1002, when the effect RAM 124 is cleared, the information of the setting value flag 125, which will be described later, is also cleared (erased). The setting value flag 125 allows the effect control microcomputer 121 to grasp the set value as information on the effect side (sub side). Therefore, when the power is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 121 clears the effect RAM 124, and at the same time, clears the information of the set value.

In step S1003, other initial settings are made. In other initial settings, for example, the staging CPU 122 is set, and SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are set. If the sub-side power off flag is ON, it is turned OFF.

In step S1004, interrupts are disabled. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S1005). In the random number seed update process (S1005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The random numbers for determining the effect include a random number for determining the effect symbol for determining the effect symbol, a random number for determining the variable effect pattern for determining the variable effect pattern, and a random number for determining various advance notice effects. And so on. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above. Instead of adding the random values by 1 at the time of updating, it may be added by 2 or the like. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process (S1005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S1006). In the command transmission process (S1006), various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140. Upon receiving the command, the image control board 140 executes various effects (variation effect, opening effect, round effect, jackpot effect including ending effect, etc.) using the image display device 50 according to the command. The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently enables interrupts (S1007). After that, steps S1004 to S1007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S1008), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S1009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S1010) can be executed.

[Reception interrupt processing] In the reception interrupt processing (S1008), when the strobe signal (STB signal) is turned ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the game control board 100 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 121. And, it is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S1009, S1010). As shown in FIG. 55, in the reception interrupt processing (S1008), various commands transmitted from the game control board 100 are stored in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S1101).

[1 ms timer interrupt process] The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S1009) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 1 msec is input to the effect control board 120. As shown in FIG. 56, in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S1009), input processing is first performed (S1201). In the input process (S1201), switch data (edge data and level data) are created based on the detection signals from the input unit detection sensor 40a (see FIG. 7) and the select button detection sensor 42a (see FIG. 7).

Subsequently, the lamp data output process is performed (S1202). In the lamp data output processing (S1202), the set lamp data (data that controls the light emission of the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54) is sent to the sub drive board in order to make the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light at the timing suitable for the production. Output to 162. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 controls the light emission of the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54, so that the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 are subjected to a special first light emitting mode (FIGS. 26 (B) (E), as will be described later. ), A special second light emission mode (see FIGS. 26 (C) (D)), a special third light emission mode (see FIG. 26 (F)), and a special error light emission mode (see FIG. 30 (B)). It is possible to make it emit light with.

Next, the drive control process (S1203) is performed. In the drive control process (S1203), drive data is created and output in order to drive the board movable body 55k at a timing suitable for the production. That is, the board movable body 55k is driven in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. Then, the watchdog timer process (S1204) for resetting the watchdog timer is performed, and this process is completed.

[10 ms timer interrupt process] The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S1010) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the effect control board 120. As shown in FIG. 57, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S1010), first, the received command analysis process described later is performed (S1301). Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created by the 1 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the effect RAM 124 as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S1302). Subsequently, a switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 50a based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process (S1302) is performed (S1303).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates voice data (control data for outputting voice from the speaker 620) and executes voice control processing for outputting voice data to the image control board 140 (S1304). By this voice control process (S1304), as will be described later, a voice saying "settings can be changed" (see FIGS. 26 (B) (E)) and a voice saying "setting values have been changed" (FIG. 26 (C)). ) (See (D)), the voice "The set value has been confirmed", and a special error sound (see FIG. 30B) can be output from the speaker 620. After that, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes other processes such as creating lamp data and updating various effect determination random numbers (S1305), and ends this process.

[Receive command analysis process] As shown in FIG. 58, in the receive command analysis process (S1301), the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the game state specification command has been received (S1401), and receives the command. If so, the mode status setting process described later is performed (S1402).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a set value designation command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1403), and if has received it, performs a set value flag change process (S1404). In the set value flag change process (S1404), the set value flag 125 of the effect RAM 124 is set based on the set value information included in the set value specification command. For example, if the setting value specification command contains the information of the setting value "1", the setting value flag 125 is set to "1", and the setting value specification command contains the information of the setting value "6". If so, the set value flag 125 is set to "6". As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 can grasp the current set value.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the effect control microcomputer 121 initializes the effect RAM 124 (setting value flag 125) in step S1002 (see FIG. 52) described above, the effect control microcomputer 121 is currently based on the received setting value specification command. It is possible to grasp the set value in. As a result, as will be described later, it is possible to execute the symbol setting suggestion effect and the high setting suggestion effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a setting mode transition command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1405), and if has received it, performs a setting mode transition effect process (S1406). In the setting mode transition effect processing (S1406), the setting mode transition effect command for displaying the setting changing image SH shown in FIG. 26B is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the setting mode transition effect command displays the setting-changing image SH on the display screen 50a.

Further, in the setting mode transition effect processing (S1406), the sound data for outputting the sound "setting can be changed" (see FIG. 26B) is set in the predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the voice CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the voice data outputs the voice "settings can be changed" from the speaker 620. Further, in the setting mode transition effect processing (S1406), the lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a special first light emitting mode (see FIG. 26B) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. Set to. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special first light emitting mode. As described above, the display of the image SH during the setting change, the voice saying "the setting can be changed", and the light emission in the special first light emission mode allow the setting changer to shift to the setting change mode and set arbitrarily. It is possible to understand that the value can be changed.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a set value change command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1407), and if has received it, performs a set value change effect process (S1408). In the set value change effect process (S1408), the set value change effect command for displaying the set value change image YG shown in FIGS. 26 (C) and 26 (D) is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the setting value change effect command displays the setting value change image YG on the display screen 50a on top of the setting changing image SH (in a layered manner). As a result, it is possible to make the setting value changing image YG easier to recognize than the setting changing image SH, and to give priority to the situation where the setting value is changed.

Further, in the set value change effect process (S1408), the sound data for outputting the sound "the set value has been changed" (see FIG. 26 (C) or FIG. 26 (D)) is set to the predetermined value of the effect RAM 124. Set in the storage area of. As a result, the voice CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the voice data outputs the voice "the set value has been changed" from the speaker 620. Further, in the set value change effect processing (S1416), the lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a special second light emission mode (see FIG. 26C or FIG. 26D) is used for the effect. It is set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 124. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special second light emitting mode. As a result of the above, the display of the setting value change image YG, the voice saying "the setting value has been changed", and the light emission in the special second light emission mode, not only the setting changer but also the employees of the surrounding amusement park. It is possible for the staff to understand the situation where the set value has been changed.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a setting mode end command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1409), and if has received it, performs a setting mode end effect process described later (S1410).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1411), and if has received it, performs a variation effect start process described later (S1412).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1413), and if has received it, performs a variation effect end process (S1414). In the variation effect end process (S1414), the variation stop command is analyzed, and the variation effect end command for ending the variation effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 based on the analysis result.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1415), and if so, performs an opening effect selection process described later (S1416).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1417), and if so, performs a round effect selection process (S1418). In the round effect selection process (S1418), the round designation command is analyzed, and the pattern (content) of the round effect to be executed during the round game of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, a round effect start command for starting the round effect with the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1419), and if so, performs an ending effect selection process (S1420). In the ending effect selection process (S1420), the ending command is analyzed, and the pattern (content) of the ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect with the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 59, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an error command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1421), and if so, performs error mode notification processing (S1422). .. In the error mode notification process (S1422), the operation suggestion effect command for displaying the operation suggestion image SE shown in FIG. 30B is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the operation suggestion effect command displays the operation suggestion image SE shown in FIG. 30B on the display screen 50a.

Further, in the error mode notification process (S1422), audio data for outputting a special error sound (see FIG. 30B) is set in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the audio CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the audio data outputs a special error sound from the speaker 620. Further, in the error mode notification process (S1422), the lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a special error light emission mode (see FIG. 30B) is set in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. do. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special error light emission mode. As described above, the display of the operation suggestion image SE, the special error sound, and the light emission in the special error light emission mode indicate that the employee of the amusement park is in the error mode, that is, the set value is set. It is possible to understand that it is not.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a setting suggestion condition establishment command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1423), and if so, turns on the setting suggestion condition establishment flag (S1424). The setting suggestion condition establishment flag is a flag indicating that the number of shot balls has become a multiple of 10,000 shots such as 10,000 shots, 20,000 shots, 30,000 shots, 40,000 shots, 50,000 shots, and 60,000 shots.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs, as another process (S1425), a process based on a received command other than the above command (for example, a process for performing an effect associated with a variation display of a normal symbol). Then, the received command analysis process (S1301) is completed.

[Mode status setting process] The mode status setting process (S1402) is a process for changing the setting of the effect mode according to the change to the gaming state. When the effect control microcomputer 121 is set to the daytime mode (see FIG. 50A) when it is controlled to the low probability non-time saving state (normal game state), the mode status is set to "1". .. If the night mode (see FIG. 50B) is set when the time is controlled to be highly accurate, the mode status is set to "2". If the space mode is set when the time is controlled to be low, the mode status is set to "3". The mode status is "1" by default.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the mode status setting process (S1402), first, the currently set mode status is referred to (S1501). Then, the received game state specification command is analyzed (S1502). Then, based on the analyzed game state specification command, it is determined whether or not to change the mode status (S1503). That is, it is determined whether or not the game state information included in the analyzed game state designation command is different from the game state information based on the mode status referred to in step S1501. If it is determined that the mode status will be changed (YES in S1503), the process proceeds to step S1504. On the other hand, if it is determined not to change (NO in S1503), this process ends.

In step S1504, it is determined whether or not the game state information included in the game state specification command analyzed in step S1502 is the information of the low probability non-time saving state. If the information is in a low-probability non-time saving state (YES in S1504), set the mode status to "1" (S1505) and set the left-handed display command in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S1506). As a result, when the left-handed display command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the left-handed image La on the upper left portion of the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 50 (A). Display only for a specified time.

After step S1506, "30" is set in the normal transition counter provided in the staging RAM 124 (S1507). The normal transition counter is for counting until the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol (staging symbol EZ) reaches 30 times after the transition to the normal gaming state.

Then, following step S1507, a background effect command based on the daytime mode setting is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S1513). As a result, when the background effect command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the daytime background image Ha on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 50 (A). In this way, it is possible for the player to grasp that the effect mode is set to the daytime mode by displaying the daytime background image Ha. Then, by displaying the left-handed image La, it is possible to grasp the situation in which the ball is aimed at entering the first starting port 11 by left-handed.

If NO is determined in step S1504, it is determined whether or not the game state information included in the game state specification command analyzed in step S1502 is information in a high-accuracy time-saving state (S1508). If the information is in the high-accuracy time-saving state (YES in S1508), set the mode status to "2" (S1509) and set the right-handed display command in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S1510). As a result, when the right-handed display command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the right-handed image Ra in the upper right portion of the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 50 (B). Continue to display.

Then, following step S1510, a background effect command based on the night mode setting is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S1513). As a result, when the background effect command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the night background image Hb on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 50 (B). In this way, it is possible for the player to grasp that the effect mode is set to the night mode by displaying the night background image Hb. Then, by displaying the right-handed image Ra, it is possible to grasp the situation in which the ball is aimed at entering the second starting port 12 by right-handed hitting.

If NO is determined in step S1508, the game state information included in the game state specification command analyzed in step S1502 is the information of the low probability time saving state, and the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, the mode status is set to "3", and the right-handed display command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S1512). As a result, when the right-handed display command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the right-handed image Ra in the upper right portion of the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 50 (C). Continue to display.

Then, following step S1512, a background effect command based on the space mode setting is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S1513). As a result, when the background effect command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the space background image Hc on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 50 (C). In this way, it is possible for the player to grasp that the effect mode is set to the night mode by displaying the space background image Hc. Then, by displaying the right-handed image Ra, it is possible to grasp the situation in which the ball is aimed at entering the second starting port 12 by right-handed hitting.

[Setting Mode End Setting Process] As shown in FIG. 61, in the setting mode end setting process (S1410), the effect control microcomputer 121 first executes the setting mode end effect process (S1601). In the setting mode end effect processing (S1601), the setting value confirmation effect command for displaying the set value confirmation image SK shown in FIG. 26 (F) is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the setting value confirmation effect command has the setting shown in FIG. 26 (F) from the display of the setting changing image SH shown in FIG. 26 (E) on the display screen 50a. Switch to the display of the value confirmation image SK.

Further, in the setting mode end effect processing (S1601), the sound data for outputting the sound "the set value has been confirmed" (see FIG. 26F) is set in the predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the voice CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the voice data outputs the voice "The set value has been confirmed" from the speaker 620. Further, in the setting mode end effect processing (S1601), the lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a special third light emission mode (see FIG. 26F) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. Set to. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special third light emitting mode. As a result, not only the setting changer but also the employees of the surrounding amusement parks can be displayed by displaying the setting value confirmation image SK, the voice saying "the setting value has been confirmed", and the light emission in the special third light emission mode. Also, it is possible to grasp the situation where the set value is fixed.

After step S1601, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the value of the set value flag has been changed in the setting change mode. That is, in the setting change mode when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the set value is changed from the value of the set value before the power is turned on. If it is determined that the set value has not been changed (NO in S1602), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the set value has been changed, the set value change status flag is turned ON (YES in S1603), and this process ends.

[Variation effect start processing] As shown in FIG. 62, in the variation effect start process (S1412), the effect control microcomputer 121 first analyzes the variation start command (S1701). The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 18) and information on the special figure stop symbol data based on the determination of a jackpot or the like. Next, the effect symbol selection process described later is executed (S1702), and subsequently, the variable effect pattern selection process described later is executed (S1703).

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the advance notice effect selection process (S1704). As a result, the content of the advance notice effect such as the so-called step-up advance notice effect and the chance-up advance notice effect is determined. Next, the drive data setting process for setting the drive data according to the selected variation effect pattern is executed (S1705).

After that, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the selected effect symbol, the variation effect pattern, and the variation effect start command for starting the variation effect in the advance notice effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S1706). When the variation effect start command set in step S1506 is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads a predetermined effect image from the image ROM 142 and displays the image display device 50. A variable effect is performed on the screen 50a.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the value of the normal transition counter is larger than "0" (S1707). That is, in the process of step S1707, it is determined whether or not the number of times of variation display of the special symbol (staging symbol EZ) has reached 30 times after the transition to the normal gaming state. If it is not greater than "0" (NO in S1707), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is greater than "0" (YES in S1707), the value of the normal transition counter is decremented by "1" (S1708). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting change status flag is ON (S1709). That is, it is determined whether or not the set value has been changed in the setting change mode when the power is turned on. If the setting change status flag is not ON (NO in S1709), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the setting change status flag is ON (YES in S1709), it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won based on the fluctuation pattern information (S1710). If you have not won the jackpot (NO in S1710), this process ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot is won (YES in S1710), the setting change suggestion flag is turned ON (S1711), and the process proceeds to step S1712. The setting change suggestion flag is a flag for executing a special opening effect, as will be described later. In this way, the set value was changed in the setting change mode when the power was turned on, and the jackpot was won between the transition to the normal gaming state and the number of times the special symbol variation display reached 30 times. If it is a situation, the setting change suggestion flag for executing the special opening effect will be turned ON.

In step S1712, it is determined whether or not the game start flag is OFF. The game start flag indicates that the game has already started at the present time. In other words, the game start flag indicates that the variable display of the special symbol (staging symbol EZ) has been started one or more times since the power was turned on. If the game start flag is OFF (YES in S1712), since it is the situation that the variation display of the staging symbol EZ is started for the first time after the power is turned on, the game start flag is turned ON (S1713) and this process is completed. .. On the other hand, if the game start flag is ON, the game has already started, so it is determined as NO in step S1712, and this process ends. The game start flag is set to OFF by default.

[Staging symbol selection process] The staging symbol selection process (S1702) is a process for determining the staging symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to be finally stopped and displayed in the variable staging effect. As shown in FIG. 63, in the effect symbol selection process (S1702), the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether the information of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 18) indicates a loss (S1801). If it indicates a loss (YES in S1801), then the loss effect symbol EZ is determined using the loss effect symbol lottery table based on the set value flag 125 (S1802). The determined loss effect symbol EZ is the effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed at the end of the three effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 indicating the loss mode. Following step S1802, two staging symbols EZ excluding the lost staging symbol EZ are determined by lottery using a staging symbol lottery table (not shown) based on the variation pattern, and this process is completed.

As described above, for example, if the set value flag 125 indicates "6", the lost effect symbol random number is acquired, and the lost effect symbol random number is generated using the lost effect symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 34 (F). judge. In this case, since the sixth effect symbol EZf is easily determined as the loss effect symbol EZ, the execution frequency of the symbol setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 35 (B) is high. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess that the set value is "6" and to be interested in the loss mode of the staging pattern EZ.

On the other hand, in step S1801, if the fluctuation pattern information does not indicate a loss (NO in S1801), it means that the jackpot has been won, and the process proceeds to step S1804. In this case, the three staging symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that are stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) are determined by lottery using a staging symbol lottery table for jackpots (not shown) based on the variation pattern (S1804). , Finish this process.

[Variable staging pattern selection process] The variable staging pattern selection process (S1703) is a process for determining a variable staging pattern, which is the content of the variable staging. Once the variable staging pattern is determined, the time of the staging effect, the variable display mode of the staging pattern, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the content of the set value suggestion effect, SW The details of the content of the variable effect, which includes the presence / absence of the effect (effect button effect), the content of the SW effect, the effect development configuration, the type of the background of the effect pattern, etc., will be determined.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the variation effect pattern selection process (S1703), the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether the information of the variation pattern (see FIG. 18) indicates SP reach loss (S1801). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation patterns are P11, P12, P13, P41, P42, and P43 (see FIG. 18). If it indicates SP reach loss (YES in S1801), then it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion condition establishment flag is ON (S1802). If it is ON (YES in S1802), the setting suggestion condition establishment flag is turned OFF (S1803), and the process proceeds to step S1804. In short, the case of proceeding to step S1804 is SP reach loss, and the number of shot balls exceeds a multiple of 10,000 shots.

In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value flag is "4", "5", or "6". If it is "4", "5", or "6" (YES in S1804), a lottery is performed based on the variation pattern using a variation effect pattern table for which there is a high setting suggestion effect (not shown). As a result, the SP reach loss fluctuation effect pattern with the high setting suggestion effect is determined, and this process is completed. In this way, when the SP reach loss fluctuation effect pattern with the high setting suggestion effect is determined, the battle effect shown in FIG. 36 (A) ⇒ the battle defeat effect shown in FIG. 36 (B) ⇒ the effect shown in FIG. 36 (C). After the stop display in the loss mode of the symbol EZ, as shown in FIG. 36 (D), the high setting suggestion effect showing the phoenix image FT is executed. As a result, the player who is disappointed by the SP reach loss is made to grasp the phoenix image FT, and it is as if the high setting (setting value is "4" or "5" or "6") is acquired by the resurrection. It is possible to give a feeling of exhilaration.

On the other hand, when it is not SP reach loss (NO in S1801), when the setting condition suggestion flag is not ON (NO in S1802), and when the set value is not set high ("4" or "5" or "6") ( NO) on S1704, proceed to step S1806. In step S1806, a lottery is performed using a variation effect pattern table for no high setting suggestion effect (not shown) based on the variation pattern. As a result, the variable effect pattern without the high setting suggestion effect is determined, and this process is completed.

[Opening effect selection process] As shown in FIG. 65, in the opening effect selection process (S1416), the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the setting change suggestion flag is ON (S1901). If the setting change suggestion flag is ON (YES in S1901), a special opening effect pattern is selected (S1902). Then, the setting change suggestion flag is turned off (S1903), and the opening effect start command for starting the opening effect (special opening effect) with the selected special opening effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S1903). S1905), this process is completed. When the opening effect start command set in this case is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads the special opening image KP shown in FIG. 51 (B) from the image ROM 142. , A special opening effect is executed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50.

On the other hand, in step S1901, if the setting change suggestion flag is not ON (NO in S1901), the normal opening effect pattern is selected (S1904). Then, the opening effect start command for starting the opening effect (normal opening effect) in the selected normal opening effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S1905), and this process is completed. When the opening effect start command set in this case is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads the normal opening image TP shown in FIG. 51 (A) from the image ROM 142. , A normal opening effect is executed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50.

[Customer Waiting Effect Selection Process] As shown in FIG. 66, in the customer waiting effect selection process (S1426), the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the setting change status flag is ON (S2001). If the setting change status flag is ON (YES in S2001), then it is determined whether or not the game start flag is OFF (S2002). In short, in the processing of step S2001 and step S2002, the setting value is changed in the setting change mode at the time of turning on the power, and the game has not been started yet (the variation display of the special symbol has never started yet). It means that it is judged whether it is a situation (not done). If the determination result in step S2002 is YES, the special customer waiting effect pattern lottery process is executed in order to determine whether or not to execute the special customer waiting effect by lottery (S2003). In the special customer waiting effect pattern lottery process (S2003), specifically, the special customer waiting effect random number is acquired, and the acquired special customer waiting effect random number is determined using the special customer waiting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. By doing so, it is decided whether or not to make a special customer waiting production pattern.

If it is decided to use the special customer waiting effect pattern by the special customer waiting effect pattern lottery process in step S2003 (YES in S2004), the customer waiting effect start command in the special customer waiting effect pattern is sent to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Set (S2005) and finish this process. When the opening effect start command set in this case is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is displayed on the selection standby images SM1 and FIG. 53 (C) shown in FIG. 53 (B). The hole code compatible image HK1 shown, the hole code compatible image HK1 shown in FIG. 53 (D), and the special demo image TD2 shown in FIG. 53 (E) are read out from the image ROM 142 and shown in FIG. 53 over time. Perform a special customer waiting production.

On the other hand, if it is decided not to use the special customer waiting effect pattern by the special customer waiting effect pattern lottery process in step S2003 (NO in S2004), the customer waiting effect start command in the normal customer waiting effect pattern is produced. It is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 (S2006), and this process is completed. When the opening effect start command set in this case is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is shown in the selection standby images SM1 and FIG. 52 (C) shown in FIG. 52 (B). The hole code compatible image HK1 shown, the hole code compatible image HK1 shown in FIG. 52 (D), and the normal demo image TD1 shown in FIG. 52 (E) are read out from the image ROM 142 and shown in FIG. 52 over time. Normally, a customer waiting effect is performed.

16. Effect of this embodiment As described in detail above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, the power is turned on for the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal for shifting to the setting change mode. (See FIG. 37 (A)). This makes it difficult for the fraudster to know when the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal are. As a result, at the timing of turning on the power, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an illegal act such as inputting an illegal signal similar to the setting key cylinder signal and the RAM clear switch signal to the game control microcomputer 101 to shift to the setting change mode. It is possible.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), the input timing pattern of the transition signal (setting key cylinder signal, RAM clear switch signal) includes the input timing pattern from the input timing pattern A to the input timing pattern. Eight types up to H are provided. Then, any one of these eight types of input timing patterns is determined. Therefore, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal are not fixed at a certain timing. Therefore, it becomes more difficult for the fraudster to grasp when the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal are, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act more difficult to perform.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), the input timing pattern E, the input timing pattern F, the input timing pattern G, or the input timing is used as the input timing pattern of the transition signal. When the pattern H is determined, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal are different. As a result, it becomes difficult for the fraudster to grasp both the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act more difficult to perform.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), the input timing pattern A, the input timing pattern B, the input timing pattern C, or the input timing is used as the input timing pattern of the transition signal. When the pattern D is determined, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal become the same. On the other hand, as described above, when the input timing pattern E, the input timing pattern F, the input timing pattern G, or the input timing pattern H is determined, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the RAM clear switch signal are determined. The input timing is different. As a result, it becomes more difficult for the fraudster to grasp at what timing the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal are performed, which makes it more difficult to commit fraudulent activity. It is possible.

17. Modification example The modification example will be described below. In the description of the modified example, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be appropriately combined and configured. Further, the technical features in the above-described embodiment and the following modified examples can be appropriately deleted unless they are described as essential in the present specification.

<Second form>
In the above mode (first form), the special opening effect shown in FIG. 51 (B) is executed as the opening effect to suggest that the set value is changed in the setting change mode. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the special sound effect effect shown in FIG. 68 is executed in the high accuracy time saving state, which suggests that the set value is changed in the setting change mode. Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69.

In the second mode, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the special symbol is displayed between the time when the special symbol is controlled to the normal gaming state and the number of times the special symbol is displayed to change 30 times. Only when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special sound effect effect as a setting change suggestion can be executed. Specifically, the special sound effect effect is an effect in which a special sound effect called "Kakeen" is output from the speaker 620 during the variable effect. The special sound effect "Kakeen" is a sound that is not output except for the special sound effect effect.

In the second form of the special sound effect effect, the jackpot is won by lottery of the special symbol between the time when it is controlled to the normal game state and the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol reaches 30 times, and after the jackpot game. It can be executed only in a high-accuracy time-saving state (night mode). However, the special sound effect effect is not always executed every time the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) is executed in the high accuracy time saving state. The special sound effect effect is executed during the variable effect only when it is determined to execute the special sound effect effect based on the special sound effect effect determination table shown in FIG. 67. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the special sound effect effect random number, and uses the special sound effect effect table shown in FIG. 69 to determine the acquired special sound effect effect random number, thereby producing the special sound effect effect. It will be decided whether or not to execute.

In this way, for the player, the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery between the time when the game is controlled to the normal gaming state and the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol reaches 30 times, and the high accuracy time saving state after the jackpot game. In the case of shifting to, attention will be paid to whether or not the special sound effect effect is executed for each variable effect. Then, when the special sound effect effect can be grasped, it is possible to grasp the situation where the set value has been changed and expect the change to a relatively high set value. In addition, even if the special sound effect effect is not executed, the player can grasp the situation where the set value has not been changed, and by referring to the game data of the previous day, the set value at the present time can be more estimated. It will be easier.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the second form, it is possible to make the player who grasps the special sound effect effect guess which set value has been changed, and it is possible to improve the motivation for playing. Is possible. In particular, since the special sound effect effect can be executed only in the high-accuracy time-saving state, it is possible to make the player more interested in the effect in the high-accuracy time-saving state. Then, when the special sound effect effect is executed, the player who feels an uplifting feeling in the high probability state is made to expect that the set value is changed to a set value larger than "1". It is possible to give an even greater uplifting feeling. Since the other actions and effects of the second form are the same as the above-mentioned actions and effects of the first form, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Other variants>
In the first embodiment, either the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal or the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal is delayed from the timing of turning on the power (see FIG. 37 (A)). However, either one of the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal or the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal may be set to be the same as the power-on timing, and the other may be delayed from the power-on timing.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), eight types of input timing patterns of the transition signal (setting key cylinder signal, RAM clear switch signal) are provided from the input timing pattern A to the input timing pattern H. Has been done. However, the input timing pattern of the transition signal is not limited to 8 types, and may be 9 types or more, or 7 types or less. It should be noted that the transition timing pattern may be one type, and in this case, at least one of the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal or the input body timing of the RAM clear switch signal may be delayed from the timing of turning on the power. ..

In the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 randomly determines any of the input timing patterns from the input timing pattern A to the input timing pattern H by lottery. However, if it is possible to make the input timing pattern at the time of the previous power-on different from the input timing pattern at the time of the current power-on, the method of determining the input timing pattern by the game control microcomputer 101 can be appropriately changed. Is. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may determine any of the input timing patterns from the input timing pattern A to the input timing pattern H based on a predetermined order.

In the first embodiment, in all eight types of input timing patterns from the input timing pattern A to the input timing pattern H, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal are set to be higher than the power-on timing. I tried to delay it (see FIG. 37 (A)). However, in any of the plurality of input timing patterns, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal may be the same as the power-on timing.

In the first embodiment, in the input timing pattern A, the input timing pattern B, the input timing pattern C, and the input timing pattern D, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal are the same (FIG. 37). See (A)). However, in the input timing pattern A, the input timing pattern B, the input timing pattern C, and the input timing pattern D, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal may be different from each other. In short, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal may be different in all eight types of input timing patterns.

In the first embodiment, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal are different in the input timing pattern E, the input timing pattern F, the input timing pattern G, and the input timing pattern H (FIG. 37). See (A)). However, in the input timing pattern E, the input timing pattern F, the input timing pattern G, and the input timing pattern H, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal may be the same. In short, the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal and the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal may be the same in all eight types of input timing patterns.

In the first embodiment, when the lottery is performed using the input timing pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (B), each input timing pattern is determined with a similar distribution rate (12% or 13%). It was like that. However, the fraction rate at which each input timing pattern is determined is not limited to 12% or 13%, and can be changed as appropriate.

The time for delaying the input timing of the setting key cylinder signal from the time when the power is turned on is not limited to the time shown in FIG. 37 (A), and can be appropriately changed. Further, the time for delaying the input timing of the RAM clear switch signal from the timing for turning on the power is not limited to the time shown in FIG. 37 (A), and can be appropriately changed.

In the first embodiment, the special demo image TD2 (see FIG. 53 (E)) is displayed in the special customer waiting effect as a setting change suggestion suggesting that the set value has been changed. However, the display mode of the special demo image TD2 is appropriately changed, and for example, the display mode may be such that a special effect image is superimposed on the normal demo image TD1. Further, the setting change suggestion may be made by changing the normal standby image TT1, the selection standby image SM1, the hole code compatible image HK1, and the newly registered image ST1 to a special display mode.

In the first embodiment, the special demo image TD2 can be displayed (setting change suggestion is executed) only during the execution of the customer waiting effect (customer waiting effect before the game) after the power is turned on and before the game is started. did. However, the special demo image TD2 may be displayed (the setting change suggestion can be executed) even during the execution of the customer waiting effect (customer waiting effect after the game) after the game is started after the power is turned on.

In the first embodiment, the special demo image TD2 is displayed in the special customer waiting effect to indicate that the set value has been changed. However, other than the method of displaying the image, it may be suggested that the set value has been changed. For example, in a special customer waiting effect, the frame lamp 212 or the board lamp 54 (light emitting means) may emit light in a special light emitting mode, or a special sound (sound effect, BGM, music, etc.) may be output from the speaker 620. good.

In the first embodiment, if the special demo image TD2 is displayed instead of the normal demo image TD1 during the execution of the customer waiting effect, it is confirmed that the set value has been changed. That is, the display of the special demo image TD2 suggested that the change of the set value was confirmed. However, when the special demo image TD2 is displayed, it may be suggested that the set value is more likely to be changed than when the normal demo image TD1 is displayed.

In the first mode, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the customer waiting effect is executed before the game is started, and the special customer waiting effect pattern is determined by lottery. When this is done, a special customer waiting effect (display of the special demo image TD2) is executed. However, the conditions for executing the special customer waiting effect (display of the special demo image TD2) are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, among the above-mentioned conditions, the condition that the special customer waiting effect pattern is determined by lottery may be eliminated. Further, the setting value change suggestion may be executed in the customer waiting effect when the specific time is reached by the measurement of the real-time clock (RTC). In addition, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls are fired, a predetermined number of prize balls are acquired, and the number of times the jackpot is won from the time the power is turned on reaches the predetermined number of times, the customer waiting effect is produced. The setting change suggestion may be executed during the execution of.

In the first embodiment, when the lottery is performed using the special customer waiting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, the special customer waiting effect pattern is determined with a fractionation rate of 50%. However, the distribution rate at which the special customer waiting effect pattern is determined is not limited to 50% and can be changed as appropriate.

In the first embodiment, a special opening effect is executed as a setting change suggestion suggesting that the set value has been changed. However, the setting change suggestion is not limited to the case where it is executed as the opening effect, and may be executed as a round effect or an ending effect.

In the first mode, the special opening effect (setting change suggestion) can be executed when the low probability time reduction state (first game state) is controlled to the disadvantageous normal game state (second game state). I made it. However, the setting change suggestion may be executed when the game is controlled to a game state other than the normal game state. For example, the setting change suggestion may be executed when the control is performed from the high accuracy time saving state (first gaming state) to the normal gaming state (second gaming state). Further, the setting change suggestion may be executed when the control is performed from the high-accuracy non-time saving state (first gaming state) to the normal gaming state (second gaming state).

In the first embodiment, the special opening effect (suggestion of setting change) can be executed when the player shifts to a gaming state (normal gaming state) that is disadvantageous to the player. However, the setting change suggestion may be executed when the game state is changed to be advantageous to the player. For example, the special opening effect may be executed when the normal gaming state is changed to the jackpot gaming state. Further, the setting change suggestion may be executed when the transition from the high-accuracy time-saving state to the high-accuracy non-time-saving state (for example, the small hit rush state) is triggered.

In the first form described above, if a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery until the number of times of variable display of the special symbol reaches 30 times (until a predetermined time point) after being controlled to the normal gaming state, a special opening effect (setting change) is performed. Suggestion) can be executed. However, the condition (condition up to a predetermined time point) that the variation display of the special symbol reaches 30 times after being controlled to the normal gaming state may be appropriately changed. For example, the above-mentioned number of times of 30 may be changed to another number of times. Further, for example, if a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery by the time when a predetermined predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses after being controlled to the normal gaming state, the setting change suggestion may be executed. ..

In the first embodiment, the special opening effect (suggestion of setting change) can be executed when the specific condition of winning the big hit in the special symbol lottery is satisfied. However, the establishment of the above-mentioned specific conditions can be changed as appropriate. For example, the establishment of a specific condition may be determined by the fact that special figure reservations have been accumulated up to a predetermined number (for example, the upper limit number), that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 10, or that a specific effect has been executed. .. Further, for example, it may be that a predetermined number of game balls have been fired, a predetermined number of prize balls have been acquired, the number of times the jackpot has been won since the power was turned on has reached a predetermined number, and the like.

In the first mode, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode, the special symbol is drawn by lottery between the time when the game is controlled to the normal game state and the number of times the special symbol is displayed to be changed to 30 times. If you win, a special opening production will always be performed. However, depending on the lottery, the special opening effect may be executed or the special opening effect may not be executed.

In the first form or the second form, a special opening effect or a special sound effect effect is executed as a setting change suggestion. However, the setting change suggestion may be an effect other than the above. For example, the frame lamp 212 or the board lamp 54 (light emitting means) may be made to emit light in a special light emitting mode, or the speaker 620 (sound output means) may output a special sound effect other than BGM or "Kakeen". .. Further, a special effect image, a special display mode such as an effect pattern, a special character image, a special item image, and a special customer waiting image may be displayed on the display screen 50a.

In the first form or the second form, when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the display of the special demo image TD2, the special opening effect, or the special sound effect effect is displayed as a setting change suggestion. Made it possible to be executed. However, as a suggestion of no change suggesting that the set value was not changed when the set value was not changed in the setting change mode at the time of turning on the power, the special demo image TD2 (see FIG. 53 (E)) It may be possible to perform effects such as display, special opening effect (see FIG. 51 (B)), and special sound effect effect (see FIG. 68). In this case, the player can grasp that the set value has not been changed if no change suggestion such as display of the special demo image TD2, special opening effect, and special sound effect effect is executed. If no change suggestion is executed, it is possible to know that the set value has been changed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestion without change is executed, and it is possible to improve the motivation to play.

In the first form or the second form, the set value can be set from the six types of set values from "1" to "6". However, it may be configured as a gaming machine in which a set value can be set from 6 or less types of set values. This is because the smaller the number of types of setting values, the more important the setting change suggestion that suggests that the setting value has been changed. For example, in the case of a gaming machine that is set to either of the two types of setting values of "1" and "6", if it can be grasped that the set value has been changed by the setting change suggestion, "1" or "6". It becomes easy to guess which setting value has been changed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to substantially grasp the value of the set value itself, and it is possible to give a great privilege to the player.

In the second embodiment, when the lottery is performed using the special sound effect effect determination table shown in FIG. 69, it is determined that the special sound effect effect is executed at a distribution rate of 3%. However, the distribution rate at which the special sound effect effect is executed is not limited to 3% and can be changed as appropriate.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B), (C), and (D), the set value may be directly shown on the 7-segment display 300, while the display screen 50a and the speaker of the image display device 50 are displayed. The set value was not directly shown by using 620. On the other hand, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 70, the set value may be directly indicated by using the display screen 50a and the speaker 620 of the image display device 50.

That is, when the setting change mode transition operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the set value set before the power is turned on (for example, "" is set in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. 1 ”) is displayed, and the initial set value image YG1 showing the above set value (for example,“ 1 ”) is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 from above the setting changing image SH. With this initial set value image YG1, it is possible to make the setting changer and the employees of the surrounding amusement park more easily understand the set value set before the power is turned on. In this modification, the game control microcomputer 101 sends a set value specification command in step S033 shown in FIG. 34, and the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the set value specification command, and the initial set value is set. The display control of the image YG1 may be executed.

After that, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the set value "2" is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, and the image display device. On the display screen 50a of 50, the change setting value image YG2 indicating the setting value “2” is displayed from above the setting changing image SH. At this time, the speaker 620 outputs a voice saying "The set value has been changed to" 2 "". By displaying the changed setting value image YG2 and the sound from the speaker 620, it is possible to make the setting changer and the employees of the surrounding amusement park more easily understand the changed setting value. In this modification, the game control microcomputer 101 sends a set value specification command in step S037 shown in FIG. 34, and the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the set value specification command. The display control of the image YG2 and the voice control of "the setting value has been changed to" 2 "" may be executed.

Subsequently, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), the change setting value image YG3 indicating the setting value "3" is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the speaker is displayed. From 620, the voice "The set value has been changed to" 3 "" will be output, and the notification of the set value will change from "2" to "3", as shown in FIG. 70 (C) above. It is the same as the case shown.

After that, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display 300 as shown in FIG. 70 (F) from the state shown in FIG. 70 (E), and the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 is executed. Displays the set value confirmation notification image SL indicating the characters "the set value has been confirmed to" 3 "". At this time, the speaker 620 outputs a voice saying "The set value has been confirmed to be" 3 "". By displaying the set value confirmation notification image SL and the voice from the speaker 620, it is possible to make the setting changer and the employees of the surrounding amusement park understand the set value confirmed in an easy-to-understand manner. In this modification, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits the setting mode end command in step S040 shown in FIG. 34, and the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the setting mode end command, and the set value is confirmed. The display control of the notification image SL and the voice control of "the set value has been confirmed to" 3 "" may be executed.

As described above, the modified example shown in FIG. 70 has an advantage that it is easy to grasp the set value set before the power is turned on, the changed set value, and the fixed set value. On the other hand, there is a demerit that there is a high risk that the set value will be grasped by anyone other than the employees of the amusement park. It should be noted that a light emitting means such as a frame lamp 212 or a board lamp 54 may be used to notify the set value set before the power is turned on, the changed set value, and the fixed set value.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, the set value displayed in the lighting mode (changeable mode) on the 7-segment display 300 becomes a non-display mode as shown in FIG. 26 (D). Instead, the initial display was executed as shown in FIG. 26 (F). On the other hand, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 71, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, the set value displayed in the lighting mode may be changed to a display mode other than the non-display mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), it is assumed that the set value indicating, for example, "3" is displayed in the lighting mode in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 in the setting change mode. When the setting confirmation operation is performed at this time, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the setting value indicating "3" in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 blinks (repeating light emission and extinguishing). Aspect) may be used to emit light. This makes it possible to show to the person who changes the setting which setting value is confirmed in an easy-to-understand manner. Then, after the set value is displayed in the blinking mode for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the set value is in the non-display mode as shown in FIG. 71 (C), and the initial display is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. It may be executed. In the modified example shown in FIG. 71, the display mode of the set value shown during the setting change mode is set as the lighting mode, and the display mode of the set value shown when the setting confirmation operation is performed is set as the blinking mode. The display mode is an example and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 does not display the base when displaying the set value on the 7-segment display 300, and does not display the set value when displaying the base. .. However, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 72, in the 7-segment display 300, for example, the base is displayed in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, and the set value is displayed in the fourth display area 340, for example. You may do so. In this case, the playground employee can grasp both the set value and the base at the same time. It should be noted that the display area in which the set value or the base is displayed can be appropriately changed from the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340.

Further, in the first embodiment, the set value and the base can be displayed on one 7-segment display 300. On the other hand, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 73, the display means for displaying the set value and the display means for displaying the base may be provided separately. For example, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), the set value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the first display means (7-segment display) 300A, and as shown in FIG. 73 (B). The base may be displayed in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the second display means (7-segment display) 300B. The display means for displaying the set value or the base is not limited to the 7-segment display, but may be another segment display, a display screen 50a of the image display device 50, a sub liquid crystal display device, or the like. Further, a display means for displaying the set value and a display means for displaying the base may be provided on a board other than the game control board 100.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 is supplied from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100, and then returned to the payout control board 170 to be supplied again. do not have. On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIG. 74, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 is configured to be supplied from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100 and then returned to the payout control board 170 again. ing.

As shown in FIG. 74, in the electric circuit DK2 of this modification, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by a harness HN5. The connector CN9 at one end of the harness HN5 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and the connector CN10 at the other end of the harness HN5 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN5 is provided with a wiring H11 for supplying electric power (normal power supply) of DC5V from the power supply unit 190 and a wiring H12 serving as a ground wire.

In the payout control board 170, there is a power line A11 (specific power line) between the connector CN10 and the branch portion J3. The power line A11 is connected to the wiring H11 of the harness HN5 via the connector CN10. Further, in the payout control board 170, there is a power line A14 connected to the ground G. The power line A14 is connected to the wiring H12 of the harness HN5 via the connector CN10.

A filter NF1 similar to the filter NF1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN10 side of the power line A11. With this filter NF1, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the normal power supply supplied by the power line A11. Further, a capacitor CA1 similar to the capacitor CA1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the branch portion J3 side of the power line A11 with respect to the filter NF1. With this capacitor CA1, it is possible to prevent the voltage of DC5V from dropping when the fluctuation (load) of the current in the normal power supply becomes large.

Further, a capacitor CA2 similar to the capacitor CA2 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the branch portion J3 side of the power line A11 with respect to the capacitor CA1. With this capacitor CA2, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the normal power supply on the power line A11. There is a power line C11 (first specific power line) from the branch portion J3 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line C11 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power supply is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring H11, the power line A11, and the power line C11. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can operate based on the normal power supply at the normal time.

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN6. The connector CN11 at one end of the harness HN6 is connected to the payout control board 170, and the connector CN12 at the other end of the harness HN6 is connected to the game control board 100. The harness HN6 includes wiring H16 for supplying backup power from the game control board 100 to the payout control board 170, wiring H14 for supplying backup power from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100, and normal power supply. Wiring H15 for supplying from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100 is provided.

The payout control board 170 has a power line A12 (second specific power line) from the branch portion J3 to the wiring H14 of the harness HN6, and the resistance T1 (existing in the comparative example) described in the comparative example is on the branch portion J3 side of the power line A12. The same resistance T1 as in FIG. 10) is connected in series. With this resistance T1, it is possible to suppress the current from the branch portion J3 to the resistance T1. Further, a diode DO1 similar to the diode DO1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN11 side of the power line A12 with respect to the resistor T1. With this diode DO1, it is possible to prevent the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) described later from going from the diode DO1 to the branch portion J3.

Further, a capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) similar to the capacitor CA3 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN11 side of the power line A12 with respect to the diode DO1. As a result, when the power is cut off, the backup power can be supplied by discharging the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3. Further, in the power line A12, a capacitor CA4 similar to the capacitor CA4 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN11 side of the capacitor CA3. With this capacitor CA4, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the backup power supply supplied by the power line A12.

Further, the power line A12 is connected to the wiring H14 via the connector CN11. The wiring H14 is connected to the power line D11 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN12. The power line D11 is connected to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. Thereby, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 can be supplied to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the power line A12, the wiring H14, and the power line D11 at the time of power failure.

The payout control board 170 has a power line A13 from the branch portion J3 to the wiring H15 of the harness HN6. The power line A13 is connected to the wiring H15 via the connector CN11. The wiring H15 is connected to the power line D12 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN12. The power line D12 is connected to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, normal power can be supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the wiring H11, the power line A11, the power line A13, the wiring H15, and the power line D12.

In the electric circuit DK2 of this modification, the power line D13 is branched from the branch portion J4 of the power line D11 of the game control board 100. The power line D13 is connected to the wiring H16 via the connector CN12. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 74, only in the state where the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by the harness HN6, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 is used as the power line A12, the wiring H14, and the power line D11. It is possible to supply power to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line D13, the wiring H16, and the power line B11. That is, the backup power supply is supplied to the game control board 100 from the payout control board 170, and then returned to the payout control board 170 from the game control board 100 to be supplied to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. It has become so.

Here, at the time of the in-circuit inspection, as shown in FIG. 75, the in-circuit tester INC is connected to the payout control board 170 with the payout control microcomputer 171 removed from the payout control board 170. At this time, the in-circuit tester INC controls to supply electric power to the electric power line A11 and the electric power line A12. As a result, the in-circuit inspection is performed while the electric charge is stored in the capacitor CA3. Then, after the in-circuit inspection is completed, the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170. However, at this time, the payout control board 170 is not connected to the game control board 100 via the harness HN6 (see FIG. 74).

Therefore, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 does not return from the payout control board 170 to the payout control board 170 via the game control board 100, and does not act on the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the payout control microcomputer 171 malfunctions. At the stage of connecting the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 with the harness HN6 when assembling the entire pachinko gaming machine PY1, no electric charge remains in the capacitor CA3, so that the payout control microcomputer 171 malfunctions. There is no such thing.

As described in detail above, according to the electric circuit DK2 of this modification, as shown in FIG. 74, the capacitor CA3 provided on the payout control board 170 (specific control board) uses the backup power supply as the game control board. It can be supplied to 100 (another substrate) and can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 (specific control means) of the payout control board 170. Therefore, it is possible to supply backup power to two control boards without providing a capacitor as a backup power supply means in the power supply unit (power supply board, power supply unit), and a new supply relationship for backup power is constructed. It is possible to do.

Further, according to the electric circuit DK2 of this modification, when the game control board 100 is removed from the payout control board 170, the backup power supply is not supplied to the game control microcomputer 101 of the game control board 100. Further, since the backup power supply is not supplied back from the payout control board 170 to the payout control board 170 via the game control board 100, the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 as well. Therefore, it is possible to initialize the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 at the same time as removing the game control board 100. That is, even though the game control board 100 is removed and the control related to the game is stopped (the information related to the game is cleared in the game RAM 104), the information related to the payout remains in the payout RAM 174. It is possible to prevent the stored state. As a result, when the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 are operated again by the normal power supply, it is possible to start the operation from the state in which both are initialized.

Further, according to the electric circuit DK2 of this modification, as shown in FIG. 75, at the time of the in-circuit inspection, the electric power of DC5V is supplied by the electric power line A11 and the electric power line A12, and the electric charge is stored in the capacitor CA3. Therefore, immediately after the in-circuit inspection, the electric charge remains in the capacitor CA3. Therefore, when the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170 after the in-circuit inspection, the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are not connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 from acting on the payout control microcomputer 171 and to prevent the payout control microcomputer 171 from having a problem. Since the other actions and effects are substantially the same as the above-mentioned actions and effects of the first form, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, it is not possible to switch between the conductive state in which the backup power can be supplied from the capacitor CA3 to the payout control microcomputer 171 and the non-conducting state in which the backup power cannot be supplied. On the other hand, in the modified example shown in FIG. 76, a switch SW1 capable of switching between a conductive state in which backup power can be supplied from the capacitor CA3 to the payout control microcomputer 171 and a non-conducting state in which backup power cannot be supplied is provided.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the electric circuit DK3 of this modification, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 (specific control board) are connected by a harness HN7. The connector CN13 at one end of the harness HN7 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and the connector CN14 at the other end of the harness HN7 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN7 is provided with a wiring H21 for supplying electric power (normal power supply) of DC5V from the power supply unit 190 and a wiring H22 serving as a ground wire.

In the payout control board 170, there is a power line A21 between the connector CN14 and the branch portion J5. The power line A21 is connected to the wiring H21 of the harness HN7 via the connector CN14. Further, in the payout control board 170, there is a power line A13 connected to the ground G. The power line A13 is connected to the wiring H22 of the harness HN7 via the connector CN14.

A filter NF1 similar to the filter NF1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN14 side of the power line A21. Further, a capacitor CA1 similar to the capacitor CA1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the branch portion J5 side of the power line A21 with respect to the filter NF1. Further, a capacitor CA2 similar to the capacitor CA2 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the branch portion J5 side of the power line A11 with respect to the capacitor CA1. There is a power line C21 from the branch portion J5 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line C21 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power supply is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring H21, the power line A21, and the power line C21. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 (specific control means) can operate based on the normal power supply at the normal time. The power line A21 corresponds to a "specific power line", and the power line C21 corresponds to a "normal power line".

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN8. The connector CN15 at one end of the harness HN8 is connected to the payout control board 170, and the connector CN16 at the other end of the harness HN8 is connected to the game control board 100. The harness HN8 is provided with wiring H24 for supplying backup power from the game control board 100 to the payout control board 170, and wiring H25 for supplying normal power from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100. There is.

The payout control board 170 has a power line A22 from the branch portion J5 to the wiring H24 of the harness HN8, and the branch portion J5 side of the power line A22 is similar to the resistance T1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example. The resistors T1 are connected in series. Further, a diode DO1 similar to the diode DO1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN15 side of the power line A22 with respect to the resistor T1.

Further, a capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) similar to the capacitor CA3 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN15 side of the power line A22 with respect to the diode DO1. As a result, when the power is cut off, the backup power can be supplied by discharging the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3. Further, in the power line A22, a capacitor CA4 similar to the capacitor CA4 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN15 side of the capacitor CA3.

Further, there is a branch portion J6 on the connector CN15 side of the power line A22 with respect to the capacitor CA4. The power line A23 extends from the branch portion J6 toward the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line A23 is connected to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. However, in the third mode, the power line A23 is provided with the switch SW1. The switch SW1 (switching means) switches between a conductive state (first state) in which backup power can be supplied by the power line A23 and a non-conducting state (second state) in which backup power cannot be supplied by the power line A23. It is a thing.

This switch SW1 is composed of a toggle switch that can switch between a conductive state and a non-conducting state by manual operation. However, the switching means capable of switching between the conductive state and the non-conducting state of the power line A23 is not limited to the mechanical switch SW1 such as the toggle switch. For example, it may be electronically controlled using a semiconductor element such as a MOSFET, and can be appropriately changed. The power line A22 and the power line A23 correspond to a "backup power line".

In this way, in the state where the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this modified example is set in the game field, the switch SW1 is in the conductive state as shown in FIG. 76. Therefore, at the time of power failure, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 is discharged, and the backup power supply can be supplied to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line A22 and the power line A23.

Further, the power line A22 is connected to the wiring H24 via the connector CN15. The wiring H24 is connected to the power line D21 of the game control board 100 (another control board) via the connector CN16. The power line D21 is connected to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 can be supplied to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 (other control means) via the power line A22, the wiring H24, and the power line D21 when the power is cut off. be.

The payout control board 170 has a power line C22 from the branch portion J5 to the wiring H25 of the harness HN8. The power line C22 is connected to the wiring H25 via the connector CN15. The wiring H25 is connected to the power line D22 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN16. The power line D22 is connected to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, normal power can be supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the wiring H21, the power line A21, the power line A22, the wiring H25, and the power line D22.

Here, at the time of the in-circuit inspection, as shown in FIG. 77, the in-circuit tester INC is connected to the payout control board 170 with the payout control microcomputer 171 removed from the payout control board 170. At this time, the in-circuit tester INC controls to supply electric power to the electric power line A21 and the electric power line A22. As a result, the in-circuit inspection is performed while the electric charge is stored in the capacitor CA3. Then, after the in-circuit inspection is completed, the switch SW1 is operated to bring the backup power supply into a non-conducting state (see FIG. 77) in which the backup power cannot be supplied by the power line A23. The switch SW1 may be in a non-conducting state before the in-circuit inspection is performed.

In this way, the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170 while the switch SW1 is kept in the non-conducting state. As a result, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 does not act on the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line A23. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the payout control microcomputer 171 malfunctions. Before assembling the entire pachinko gaming machine PY1, the switch SW1 is operated so that the backup power can be supplied by the power line A23 (see FIG. 76). This is to enable the backup power supply to be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 in the event of a power failure.

As described in detail above, according to the electric circuit DK3 of this modification, the switch SW1 is in a non-conducting state in which the backup power supply cannot be supplied by the power line A23. As a result, the backup power cannot be supplied from the capacitor CA3 to the payout control microcomputer 171. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the backup power supply from being unintentionally supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 and to prevent the payout control microcomputer 171 from having a problem.

Further, according to the electric circuit DK2 of this modification, as shown in FIG. 77, at the time of the in-circuit inspection, the electric power of DC5V is supplied by the electric power line A22, and the electric charge is stored in the capacitor CA3. Therefore, immediately after the in-circuit inspection, the electric charge remains in the capacitor CA3. Therefore, after the in-circuit inspection, when the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170, the switch SW1 is set in a non-conducting state in which the backup power supply cannot be supplied by the power line A23. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 from acting on the payout control microcomputer 171 and to prevent the payout control microcomputer 171 from having a problem. Since the other actions and effects are substantially the same as the above-mentioned actions and effects of the present embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28A, when the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder 180) is in the rotation position, an “H” level switch signal is input to the game control microcomputer 101. , As shown in FIG. 24 (B), when the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder 180) is in the process of operating from the rotation position to the standby position, the switch signal is switched from the "H" level to the "L" level. As shown in FIG. 24C, when the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder 180) is in the standby position, an “L” level switch signal is input to the game control microcomputer 101. However, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 78, the relationship between the “H” level and the “L” level in the switch signal of the above-described embodiment may be reversed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), when the setting key cylinder 180 is in the standby position, an “H” level switch signal is input to the game control microcomputer 101, and as shown in FIG. 78 (B). , When the setting key cylinder 180 is in the process of operating from the standby position to the rotation position, the switch signal is switched from the “H” level to the “L” level, and as shown in FIG. 78 (C), the setting key cylinder 180 The "L" level switch signal may be input to the game control microcomputer 101 when the is in the rotation position.

However, in the modification shown in FIG. 78, as soon as the setting key cylinder 180 starts rotating from the standby position, the switch signal is switched from the “H” level to the “L” level as shown in FIG. 78 (B). Then, it will shift to the setting change mode. In this case, it becomes easy to unintentionally shift to the setting change mode due to an unfamiliar operation or vibration of the setting changer. Therefore, the first mode (see FIG. 28) is preferable in that it is possible to prevent an unintentional transition to the setting change mode. Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 78, when the setting change mode is terminated, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), the set value may be fixed unless the setting key cylinder 180 is sufficiently rotated to the standby position. Can not. In this case, if the person who changes the setting forgets to sufficiently rotate to the standby position, the set value will continue to be displayed on the 7-segment display 300, and there is a high risk that the set value will be grasped by the surroundings. .. Therefore, in the first mode (see FIGS. 26E and 26F), as soon as the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder 180) starts to rotate from the rotation position, the setting change mode ends and 7 It is preferable in that the set value cannot be seen on the Seg display 300 (it becomes a non-display mode).

Further, in the first mode, when the setting change mode is set, the setting changing image showing the characters "setting changing" on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 as a mode suggestion to the setting change mode. The SH was displayed, the voice "settings can be changed" was output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 were made to emit light in a special first light emitting mode (see FIG. 26 (B)). However, the mode suggestion to the setting change mode may use an effect means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device) other than the effect means (image display device 50, speaker 620, frame lamp 212, and panel lamp 54) described above. Further, an effect mode other than the above (for example, display of an effect image or output of a special sound effect) may be used, for example, a special alarm sound may be output from the speaker 620, or a special character image may be displayed on the display screen 50a. You may suggest that you are in the setting change mode (the setting value can be changed).

Further, in the above first mode, the mode suggestion (display of the image SH during setting change, output of the voice saying "setting can be changed", light emission by the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 in the special first light emission mode) is to the last. It only suggested that the set value could be changed, and the selected set value itself could not be grasped. However, the effect mode may be such that the selected set value can also be grasped.

Further, in the above first mode, the image SH during the setting change is continuously displayed from the transition to the setting change mode to the end of the setting change mode, and the voice "The setting can be changed" is repeatedly output to form a frame. The lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 continued to emit light in the special first light emitting mode. That is, the mode suggestion is continuously executed only while the setting change mode is set. However, the execution period of the mode suggestion can be changed as appropriate. For example, the mode suggestion may be executed only for a predetermined period after shifting to the setting change mode, or when the mode suggestion is executed and when it is not executed. And may be repeated regularly.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the set value selected in the setting change mode is changed, an upward arrow is drawn on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 as a change suggestion suggesting that the set value has been changed. The set value change image YG shown was displayed, the voice "the set value was changed" was output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 were made to emit light in a special second light emitting mode. However, the change suggestion suggesting that the set value has been changed uses an effect means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device) other than the above-mentioned effect means (image display device 50, speaker 620, frame lamp 212, and board lamp 54). May be. Further, an effect mode other than the above (for example, display of an effect image or output of a special sound effect) may be used. For example, a sound effect indicating a pitch (pitch) according to a set value is output from the speaker 620. Alternatively, the display screen 50a may display a background image or an item image according to the set value to notify that the set value has been changed.

Further, in the first embodiment, the set value can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 while the setting change mode is set. However, the set value may be changed by operating an operation means other than the RAM clear switch 191 (for example, a dedicated operation means only for changing the set value, or an input unit 40k or a select button 42k). ..

Further, in the first embodiment, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode based on the fact that the RAM clear switch 191 (shift operation unit) is pressed when the power is turned on. However, when the power is turned on, it may be possible to shift to the setting change mode based on operating a shift operation unit other than the RAM clear switch 191 (for example, a dedicated switch provided on the game control board 100). In this case, it is preferable that the set value can be changed by operating the transition operation means other than the RAM clear switch 191 in the setting change mode. This is because if the transition operation unit for shifting to the setting change mode and the operation means for setting the setting value are separately provided, the number of parts increases.

Further, in the first embodiment, after the setting change mode is completed, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 is erased without pressing the RAM clear switch 191. However, if the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed after the setting change mode is completed, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 may not be erased. In this case, the employee of the game hall changes the set value in the setting change mode, and does not press the RAM clear switch 191 after the setting change mode ends, so that the set value without erasing the information related to the game. It is possible to have a changed situation.

Further, in the first embodiment, the change suggestion suggesting that the set value has been changed is executed with priority over the mode suggestion suggesting that the set value can be changed. In other words, the display of the setting value change image YG is executed with priority over the display of the setting changing image SH, and the output of the voice "The setting value has been changed" is higher than the output of the voice "The setting can be changed". Also, the light emission in the special second light emission mode by the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 was performed with priority over the light emission in the special first light emission mode. However, the relationship between the change suggestion and the mode suggestion can be changed as appropriate, and for example, the change suggestion and the mode suggestion may be executed at the same time (at the same timing). For example, the display of the set value changed image YG and the display of the setting changing image SH may be executed in different display areas (first display area and second display area) of the display screen 50a. Further, for example, while outputting the voice "setting can be changed" from the speaker 620 (first sound output means) provided on the left side, "setting value is changed" from the speaker 620 (second sound output means) provided on the right side. You may output the voice saying "It was done". Further, for example, the frame lamp 212 (first light emitting means) may be made to emit light in a special first light emitting mode, while the panel lamp 54 (second light emitting means) may be made to emit light in a special second light emitting mode.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the set value is changed, the entire set value change image YG is superimposed and displayed on the setting changing image SH (see FIG. 26C). However, if the display of the setting value change image YG (change suggestion image) is executed so as to be more conspicuous (priority) than the setting change image SH (mode suggestion image), the setting change change image YG is being changed. The image SH may be arranged in any way. For example, a part of the set value change image YG may be overlaid on the setting changing image SH. Further, the set value change image YG may be displayed larger than the setting changing image SH, or may be displayed in a conspicuous display area of the display screen 50a. The display mode of the set value change image YG was an upward arrow (see FIG. 26C), but it can be changed as appropriate if it can be suggested that the set value has been changed. The display mode of the image SH under setting change was to indicate the characters "setting is being changed" (see FIG. 26B), but it can be changed as appropriate if it can be suggested that the setting value can be changed. be.

Further, in the first embodiment, after the setting change mode is completed, as a suggestion effect image suggesting a setting value, an immortal bird image FT suggesting a high setting value (see FIG. 36 (D)) or a loss mode is shown. There was an effect symbol EZ that suggested the set value by the numerical part. However, a suggestion effect image other than the above may be displayed. That is, other than the high setting suggestion effect and the symbol setting suggestion effect described above may be executed. For example, a suggestion effect image suggesting a set value may be displayed during the execution of the customer waiting effect indicating that the game is not in progress.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the condition that the high setting suggestion effect is SP reach loss and the condition that the number of shot balls from the power-on reaches a multiple of 10,000 shots (predetermined number of balls) are satisfied. Run to. However, it may be executed when only one of the two conditions is satisfied, and the above conditions can be changed as appropriate. For example, when it is a big hit or when it is decided by a predetermined lottery, the high setting suggestion effect may be executed. Further, the high setting suggestion effect can be executed when the set value is "4", "5", or "6", but can be executed only when the set value is "6", for example. However, it is possible to change the setting value as appropriate. Further, the high setting suggestion effect was executed after the effect symbol EZ was stopped and displayed in a lost manner (see FIGS. 36 (C) (D)), but the execution timing of the high setting suggestion effect (display timing of the suggestion effect image) was It can be changed as appropriate. For example, the high setting suggestion effect may be executed before the battle defeat effect shown in FIG. 36 (B) is executed. Further, instead of the high setting suggestion effect, the low setting suggestion effect may be executed when the set value is "1", "2", or "3".

Further, in the first embodiment, the symbol setting suggestion effect is executed when there is a loss. However, the execution condition of the symbol setting suggestion effect is not limited to the case of loss, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, when it is a big hit or when it is decided by a predetermined lottery, the symbol setting suggestion effect may be executed. Further, in the symbol setting suggestion effect, the set value is suggested by the numerical portion of the effect symbol EZ indicating the loss mode, but the set value may be suggested by other than the effect symbol EZ. For example, the set value may be suggested by the numerical part attached to the character image or the item image. Further, the set value may be suggested (the suggestion effect image is displayed) at a timing different from the timing when the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 35 (B)).

Further, in the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits the set value designation command to the effect control microcomputer 121 at the following three timings. That is, when the first timing for processing step S010 when the power is turned on, the second timing for processing step S037 when the set value is changed, and the set value is determined with the end of the setting change mode. There was a third timing for processing step S040. However, the game control microcomputer 101 may transmit the setting value designation command at a timing other than the above, for example, even after the setting change mode ends. In this case, for example, the set value specification command may be transmitted at the start of the first fluctuation after the power is turned on. Alternatively, the setting value is specified only when the game control microcomputer 101 manages the execution of the setting value suggestion effect (display of the suggestion effect image) and causes the effect control microcomputer 121 to execute the set value suggestion effect. You may send a command.

Further, in the first embodiment, even when the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 is erased based on the operation of pressing the RAM clear switch 191, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 is stored. I tried not to erase. However, when the information related to the game is deleted, the set value information may also be deleted. In this case, for example, only when the setting change mode transition operation is performed, the information related to the game and the setting value information may be deleted immediately after the power is turned on, and then the setting change mode may be shifted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed in a state where the set value is not set because the control related to the game is executed even though the set value information is not stored. be.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the power is turned on, the set value can be displayed on the 7-segment display 300 based on the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 (FIG. 26B). reference). However, a display means other than the 7-segment display 300 (for example, a dedicated display or a display screen 50a of the image display device 50) may be set to display the set value in the previous game.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the error mode is entered, the error mode continues until the power is cut off. Therefore, the control related to the game was not executed. However, even if the mode is changed to the error mode, the error mode may be terminated and the setting change mode may be changed based on a specific operation. In this case, by setting the set value in the setting change mode, the control related to the game is executed after that. As a result, it is good to be able to execute the game.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the mode is changed to the error mode, the 7-segment display 300 emits light in an error lighting mode so as to represent the letter "E" as an error suggestion. However, any light emitting mode that can suggest that the mode has been shifted to the error mode can be appropriately changed. For example, "----" in the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 (see FIG. 24). It may be made to emit light in the light emitting mode shown in the above.

Further, in the above first mode, when the mode is shifted to the error mode, the display screen 50a displays "The set value is not set. Perform the setting change mode shift operation" as an error notification indicating that the mode is set to the error mode. The operation suggestion image SE showing the characters of is displayed, a special error sound is output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special error light emission mode. However, error notification may be executed by using an effect means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device) other than the effect means (image display device 50, speaker 620, frame lamp 212, and panel lamp 54) described above. Further, an effect mode other than the above (for example, display of a red image in the display area of the display screen 50a) may be used.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder) 180 is rotated to the rotation position when the power is turned on, but the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed, the mode shifts to the setting value confirmation mode. did. However, it may be possible to shift to the set value confirmation mode based on an operation other than the above. For example, it may be possible to shift to the set value confirmation mode while the control related to the game is being executed, except when the power is turned on. Specifically, it is possible to shift to the set value confirmation mode based on opening the gaming machine frame 2 in the customer waiting state (the state in which the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and the jackpot game is not executed). You can do it.

Further, in the first embodiment, after the setting change mode is completed, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 is erased without pressing the RAM clear switch 191. However, it is suggested that after the setting change mode is finished, the information related to the game is erased based on the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 191 by a predetermined effect means (for example, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50). Is also good. At this time, the information related to the game may be deleted only when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. In this case, after the setting change mode is finished, the employee of the game hall can arbitrarily select whether or not to delete the information related to the game.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the resistor T2 is made to function as a pull-down resistor in the normal state (when the setting key cylinder 180 is in the standby position), and the game control microcomputer 101 is set to the “L” level. Switch signal (second signal) was input. Then, in the setting change mode, the "H" level switch signal (first signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 101. However, in normal times, a predetermined resistance is made to function as a pull-up resistor, and when an "H" level switch signal (first signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 101 and the setting change mode is set, the game control is used. An "L" level switch signal (second signal) may be input to the microcomputer 101. However, even in this case, the setting change mode cannot be entered unless the setting key cylinder 180 is sufficiently rotated to the rotation position, and the setting change mode should be terminated as soon as the setting key cylinder 180 starts rotating from the rotation position. ..

Further, in the first embodiment, the transition operation means capable of shifting to the setting change mode and confirming the set value is the rotation-operable setting key cylinder 180. However, it may be possible to shift to the setting change mode and determine the set value by using an operation means capable of direct motion operation, a switch type operation means, or another transition operation means. .. Further, an operating means that enables the transition to the setting change mode and an operating means that enables the determination of the set value may be provided separately.

Further, in the first embodiment, as soon as the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder 180) starts to rotate from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting key cylinder switch 180a is switched from ON to OFF (FIG. 28 (A). ) (Refer to (B)), the setting change mode was to be terminated. However, the setting change mode may be terminated at other timings. For example, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated to an intermediate position between the rotation position and the standby position, the setting key cylinder switch 180a may be switched from ON to OFF. Further, the setting key cylinder switch 180a may not be switched from ON to OFF unless the setting key cylinder 180 is completely rotated to the standby position.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, the setting value confirmation image SK is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 26 (F), and the speaker 620 “confirms the setting value”. Was output, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 were made to emit light in a special third light emitting mode. However, it may be notified (suggested) that the set value is correctly determined by another effect mode. For example, by outputting a special sound sound from the speaker 620 or displaying a special effect image on the display screen 50a, it may be notified that the set value has been correctly determined.

Further, in the first embodiment, after shifting to the setting change mode, the 7-segment display 300 displays the set value, the initial display, and the base in order. However, the order of these displays can be changed as appropriate. For example, the initial display may be started first, then the setting value may be displayed with the start of the setting change mode, and the base may be displayed when the setting change mode ends. In the above embodiment, as the initial display, all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 on the 7-segment display 300 are turned on, but other light emitting modes (lighting modes) may be used and can be appropriately changed. ..

Further, in the first embodiment, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is that the setting key cylinder 180 is set to the rotation position and the power switch 195 is switched to the ON operation while the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. there were. However, the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode can be changed as appropriate. For example, the gaming machine frame 2 is open (the inner frame 21 is open to the outer frame, or the front door 23 is open to the inner frame 21), and the player is in a waiting state (special symbol changes). It may not be displayed and the jackpot game is not executed). It should be noted that the setting value may be changed by shifting to the setting change mode during the game (during the variable display of the special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game).

Further, in the first embodiment, the setting change mode can be terminated by rotating the setting key cylinder 180 from the rotation position to the standby position. However, the setting change mode may be terminated by using an operating means other than the setting key cylinder 180.

Further, in the first embodiment, the base in the normal gaming state is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. However, it may be possible to display the base in other gaming states. That is, the 7-segment display 300 may be capable of displaying a base in a jackpot game state, a base in a high probability state and a time saving state, a base in a normal probability state and a time saving state, and the like. Further, the base from the time when the power is turned on to the present time (base that is not divided according to the game state) may be displayed.

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of launched balls is counted based on the detection by the outlet sensor 18a. However, the method for detecting the number of launch balls can be appropriately changed. For example, the number of shot balls is counted based on the detection by the first starting port sensor 11a, the detection by the second starting port sensor 12a, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 10a, and the detection by the large winning opening sensor 14a. You can do it.

Further, in the first embodiment, the base can be displayed on the 7-segment display 300. However, the 7-segment display 300 may be capable of displaying information related to the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 other than the base. For example, as information related to the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the payout (total number of prize balls-number of fired balls) or the payout rate may be displayed. The payout rate is the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired based on the operation of the accessory to the total number of prize balls acquired from the time when the power is turned on to the present time. And in the output rate, there are a bonus ratio and a continuous bonus ratio. The prize ball ratio is the number of prize balls (roles) acquired based on the operation of all the prize balls including the ordinary electric prize ball (electric chew 12D) and the special electric prize ball (large prize device 14D) among the total prize balls. The ratio of prize balls). The continuous bonus ball ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of continuous prize balls) acquired based on the continuous operation of the special electric bonus ball among the total number of prize balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired based only on the execution of the jackpot game to the total number of prize balls.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, a capacitor CA3 capable of supplying a backup power supply is provided on the payout control board 170. On the other hand, the game control board 100 may be provided with a capacitor capable of supplying backup power. Further, in the modified example shown in FIG. 74, a capacitor capable of supplying backup power may be provided on the game control board 100. Further, in the modified example shown in FIG. 76, a capacitor capable of supplying backup power may be provided on the game control board 100. In these cases, the relationship between the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 described in FIGS. 12, 74, and 76 is reversed, and the relationship between the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101 is reversed. Only.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the normal power is not supplied from the power supply unit 190 to the payout control microcomputer 171, the capacitor CA3 of the payout control board 170 is used for both the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101. It was configured to supply backup power. However, the capacitor CA3 of the payout control board 170 may be configured so that backup power can be supplied to either the payout control microcomputer 171 or the game control microcomputer 101.

Further, in the first embodiment, the capacitor CA3 as a backup power supply means is an electric double layer capacitor. However, the backup power supply means may be a capacitor having a smaller capacitance than an electric double layer capacitor (for example, an electrolytic capacitor). Further, the backup power supply means may be, for example, a battery other than the capacitor, and can be appropriately changed. However, considering the possibility of fire due to heat generation, a capacitor is preferable to a battery in terms of safety.

Further, in the first embodiment, the power supply unit capable of supplying power based on the power supply (power of AC24V) supplied from the outside is configured as a power supply unit 190 (module) on which surface mount components can be mounted. However, the power supply unit may be configured as a power supply board on which surface mount components cannot be mounted. The power supply unit 190 and the power supply board may integrally incorporate a launch control circuit that controls the launch of the game ball (game medium).

Further, in the first embodiment, the normal power supply supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101 is DC5V (specific voltage) power. However, it may be electric power based on other voltages. The backup power supply supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101 was DC 5V power. However, it may be electric power based on other voltages.

Further, in the first embodiment, the payout control board 170 or the game control board 100 is provided with a capacitor CA3 as a backup power supply means. However, in addition to the payout control board 170 or the game control board 100, which is a control board (main board) that affects (may affect) the result of the game, a capacitor CA3 as a backup power supply means may be provided. That is, the capacitor CA3 as a backup power supply means may be provided on the staging control board 120, the image control board 140, and the sub drive board 162. Further, in this case, the target for supplying the backup power may be the effect control microcomputer 121, the image CPU 141, the image RAM 143, or the like.

Further, in the first embodiment, the power supply unit 190 supplies DC5V electric power (normal power supply) to the game control board 100, which is a board-side board, via the payout control board 170, which is a frame-side board. However, the relationship between the frame-side substrate and the board-side substrate is not limited to the relationship between the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the power supply unit 190 supplies the power of DC5V to the staging control board 120, which is a board-side board, via a firing control board (a board on which the firing control circuit 175 is mounted), which is a frame-side board. It's okay. Further, the power supply unit 190 is not limited to the electric power of DC5V, and may supply, for example, DC12V electric power, DC18V electric power, DC24V electric power, and DC37V electric power to the board side substrate via the frame side substrate. The frame-side substrate and the board-side substrate may be relay boards on which an integrated circuit (IC) is not mounted.

In the first embodiment, the model name sticker may have a jackpot winning probability described. In this case, it is preferable that the jackpot winning probability for each set value is described. Then, it is preferable that such a model name sticker is provided adjacent to the 7-segment display 300 as in the above embodiment. With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 at the time of the setting change operation. That is, it is possible to change the setting while checking the jackpot winning probability for each set value. In addition to the model name sticker, a model information sticker on which the jackpot winning probability is described may be attached to the game control board case 100A (closure case 410). The model information sticker on which the jackpot winning probability is described is referred to as a winning probability sticker. Further, the type of the model information sticker attached to the game control board case 100A can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180 are provided on the same board (on the game control board 100), but both components may be provided on different boards. Further, in the above embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is not provided on the same board as the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180 (provided on the power supply unit 190), but is provided on the same board. It may be configured as such. Further, in the above embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is used as the operation unit for the setting change operation, but the operation unit for the setting change operation may be provided separately from the RAM clear switch 191.

Further, in the first embodiment, the peripheral wall portion 413 surrounding the setting key cylinder 180 is a rectangular peripheral wall portion that matches the shape of the board connection side portion 188 of the setting key cylinder 180, but the shape and size of the peripheral wall portion are different. It can be changed as appropriate according to the shape and size of the setting key cylinder.

Further, in the first embodiment, the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A (cover case 410) are provided on the same plane, but the setting key cylinder 180 is located behind the lid case 410. It does not have to be completely coplanar unless it is clearly protruding or retracted in front of the lid case 410. That is, the keyhole surface 186 and the rear surface 410a may be substantially on the same plane. The term "substantially flush" includes cases where they are substantially on the same plane and cases where they are completely on the same plane.

Further, in each of the above forms, the machine is configured as a gaming machine in which the transition to the high probability state is determined based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol, but the so-called V-probability machine (passing through a specific area (V area) in the big winning opening) It may be configured as a gaming machine) that is controlled to a high probability state based on the above. Further, in each of the above modes, once controlled to a high-probability state, the machine is configured as a gaming machine (so-called probabilistic loop type gaming machine) in which control to the high-probability state continues until the start of the next jackpot game. It may be configured as a probabilistic number-cutting gaming machine) or a falling machine (a gaming machine whose high-probability state ends depending on the lottery result). Further, it may be configured as a so-called 1-type / 2-type mixer or a honey-type gaming machine. That is, the invention shown in the present specification can be suitably adopted for a gaming machine having various game characteristics regardless of the game characteristics of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that, for example, a pachinko gaming machine that is not controlled to a high probability state, such as a type 1 type 2 mixer, can be configured as follows. That is, the jackpot determination table is not provided with a table corresponding to the high probability state (high probability table), but is provided with only a table corresponding to the normal probability state (normal table). Then, in the table corresponding to the normal probability state, a common lower limit judgment value (common lower limit judgment value) for determining a jackpot is stored regardless of each of the set values, while corresponding to each set value. The upper limit determination value (normal upper limit determination value) for determining the jackpot may be stored. Alternatively, the table corresponding to the normal probability state stores a common upper limit judgment value (common upper limit judgment value) for determining a jackpot regardless of each of the set values, while corresponding to each set value. The lower limit determination value (normal upper limit determination value) for determining the jackpot may be stored.

Further, as a special game, a small hit game (a special game in which the total opening time of the large winning opening is as short as a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds) or less) may be performed. The state in which the small hit game is being executed is called the small hit game state.

Further, there may be a plurality of (for example, two) large winning openings (large winning devices). In this case, the first big winning opening, the first big winning opening sensor that can detect the game ball that won the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening, and the game that won the second big winning opening. It is a gaming machine equipped with a second large winning opening sensor capable of detecting a ball.

Further, in each of the above modes, four random numbers such as a jackpot random number are acquired as random numbers (determination information) to be acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. A random number may be acquired and based on the random number, whether or not it is a big hit, the type of hit, the presence or absence of reach, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined. That is, the number of random numbers to be acquired based on the starting prize and what is to be determined for each random number can be arbitrarily set.

Further, in each of the above modes, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state (special gaming state) under the control condition that the special symbol indicating that the jackpot is won is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, it may be configured as a slot machine (rotary drum type gaming machine, pachislot gaming machine).

Further, the type of the slot machine may be any type. In the case of a so-called normal machine (A type slot machine) that increases the number of medals earned by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus, the state in which a bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus is executed corresponds to a special gaming state. In addition, if it is a so-called ART machine or AT machine that increases the number of medals won during a special game period such as ART (assist replay time) or AT (assist time) that can frequently win small roles, it is in the state of ART or AT. Corresponds to the special gaming state. In addition, in the normal machine, the control conditions for the special game state are a combination of symbols that triggers the transition to the big bonus and regular bonus on the activated winning line after winning the big bonus and regular bonus. It is derived and displayed as the display result of the reel. Further, in the ART machine and the AT machine, the control condition to the special game state is, for example, after winning the execution lottery of the ART or AT, the specified number of games is exhausted, and the activation timing of the ART or AT is reached. be.

18. Inventions Shown in the Above Embodiments The inventions of the following means are shown in the above-mentioned embodiments. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiment and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the components of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means A>
The invention according to means A1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (“1” to “6”) having different jackpot determination probabilities, and
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) including a staging control means (microcomputer 121 for staging control) capable of controlling staging.
The game control means is
The setting value set in the setting change mode can be changed (see FIG. 26).
The staging control means
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery), a setting change suggestion suggesting that the set value has been changed ( It is a gaming machine characterized in that the special opening effect (shown in FIG. 49B) can be executed.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the set value is changed and a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the setting change suggestion suggesting that the set value has been changed can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who grasps the setting change suggestion guess which setting value has been changed, and it is possible to improve the motivation to play. In other words, it is possible to make the player think that the set value has been changed from the set value (for example, "1") having the lowest jackpot judgment probability among the plurality of set values, and it is possible to arouse the player's motivation to play. It is possible.

The invention according to means A2 is
In the gaming machine described in means A1,
The game control means is
It is possible to control from a predetermined first gaming state (low probability time saving state) to a second gaming state (normal gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The staging control means
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, when the specific condition is satisfied from the control to the second gaming state to a predetermined time point (until the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 30 times). It is a gaming machine characterized in that the setting change suggestion can be executed.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the first gaming state is controlled to the disadvantageous second gaming state, the player's willingness to play is reduced. However, if a specific condition is satisfied by a predetermined time after being controlled to the second gaming state, the setting change suggestion can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play up to a predetermined point in time even after being controlled to the disadvantageous second gaming state.

The invention according to means A3 is
In the gaming machine according to means A1 or means A2,
The game control means can execute a process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit based on the ball entering the ball entry port (first start port 11, second start port 12).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the establishment of the specific condition is determined to be a big hit by the determination process.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the set value is changed, if the jackpot is won, the setting change suggestion can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to stimulate the player's willingness to win the jackpot in order to grasp whether or not the setting has been changed.

The invention according to means A4 is
In the gaming machine described in means A3,
When the game control means is determined to be a big hit by the determination process, the game control means can execute a big hit game that is advantageous to the player.
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the setting change suggestion can be executed during the execution of the jackpot game (opening in the jackpot game).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, if the setting value is changed and the jackpot is won, the setting change suggestion can be executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to give a player who feels an uplifting feeling during the big hit game to know that the setting has been changed and give an even greater uplifting feeling.

The invention according to means A5 is
In the gaming machine described in means A3,
The game control means can be controlled to a high probability state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit in the determination process is higher than that in the normal probability state.
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the setting change suggestion can be executed in the high probability state.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the set value is changed, if the jackpot is won, the setting change suggestion can be executed in a high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to give a player who feels an uplifting feeling in a high probability state to know that the setting has been changed and to give an even greater uplifting feeling.

The invention according to means A6 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (“1” to “6”) having different jackpot determination probabilities, and
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) including a staging control means (microcomputer 121 for staging control) capable of controlling staging.
The game control means is
The setting value set in the setting change mode can be changed (see FIG. 26).
The staging control means
If the set value is not changed in the setting change mode and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery), there is no change suggesting that the set value is not changed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the suggestion (for example, the special opening effect shown in FIG. 49B, the special sound effect effect shown in FIG. 62) can be executed.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the predetermined specific condition is satisfied when the set value is not changed, the no-change suggestion suggesting that the set value has not been changed can be executed. In other words, if the no-change suggestion is not executed, it is possible to infer that the set value has changed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestion without change is executed, and it is possible to improve the motivation to play.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-199931, the jackpot determination probability can be set to any one of a plurality of set values different from each other. In this type of pachinko gaming machine, the player plays the game while guessing which set value is set. Here, most players often play with the assumption that the jackpot determination probability is set to the lowest setting value (for example, "1") among the plurality of set values. In this case, the player's willingness to play is reduced, and there is room for improvement. Therefore, the invention according to the means A1 to A6 can change the set value set in the setting change mode with respect to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-199931, and the effect control means. Is different in that when a set value is changed in the setting change mode and a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, a setting change suggestion suggesting that the set value has been changed can be executed. .. This makes it possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine capable of improving the motivation for playing (playing an action effect).

<Means B>
The invention according to means B1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (“1” to “6”) having different jackpot determination probabilities, and
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a staging control means (microcomputer 121 for staging control) capable of executing a customer waiting staging.
The game control means is
The setting value set in the setting change mode can be changed (see FIG. 26).
The staging control means
When the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, the setting change suggestion (display of the special demo image TD2 shown in FIG. 51 (E)) suggesting that the setting value is changed during the execution of the customer waiting effect. ) Is a game machine characterized by being able to be executed.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the set value is changed, the setting change suggestion can be executed during the execution of the customer waiting effect. Therefore, it is possible for a player who is looking for a gaming machine to play a game to know that the set value has been changed by suggesting a setting change. As a result, it is possible to make the machine seem to have changed the set value from the set value (for example, "1") having the lowest jackpot determination probability among the plurality of set values, and it is possible to improve the motivation for playing. It is possible.

The invention according to means B2 is
In the gaming machine described in means B1,
The customer waiting effect includes a pre-game customer waiting effect that is executed after the power is turned on and before the game is started, and a post-game customer waiting effect that is executed after the game is started after the power is turned on. ,
The staging control means
When the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, the setting change suggestion can be executed during the execution of the pre-game customer waiting effect, while the setting change suggestion is executed during the execution of the post-game customer waiting effect. It is a gaming machine characterized by not executing.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the setting change suggestion can be executed only during the execution of the pre-game customer waiting effect after the power is turned on and before the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to actively encourage the player to confirm whether or not the setting change suggestion is executed immediately after the opening time of the game hall. As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's willingness to play in the game immediately after the opening time of the game hall.

The invention according to means B3 is
In the gaming machine according to means B1 or means B2,
The staging control means
When the set value is not changed in the setting change mode, the normal customer waiting image (normal demo image TD1 shown in FIG. 50 (E)) is displayed during the execution of the customer waiting effect.
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, a special customer waiting image different from the normal customer waiting image (special demo image TD2 shown in FIG. 51 (E)) is used as a setting change suggestion during the execution of the customer waiting effect. ) Is a gaming machine characterized by being able to display.

The invention according to means B4 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (“1” to “6”) having different jackpot determination probabilities, and
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a staging control means (microcomputer 121 for staging control) capable of executing a customer waiting staging.
The game control means is
The setting value set in the setting change mode can be changed (see FIG. 26).
The staging control means
When the set value is not changed in the setting change mode, there is no change suggestion that the set value is not changed during the execution of the customer waiting effect (for example, the special demo image shown in FIG. 51 (E)). It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can execute (display of TD2).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, if the set value is not changed, the suggestion of no change can be executed during the execution of the customer waiting effect. In other words, it is possible to infer that the set value has been changed if the no-change suggestion is not executed during the execution of the customer waiting effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestion of no change is executed in the customer waiting effect, and it is possible to improve the motivation for the game.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-199931, the jackpot determination probability can be set to any one of a plurality of set values different from each other. In this type of pachinko gaming machine, the player plays the game while guessing which set value is set. Here, most players often play with the assumption that the jackpot determination probability is set to the lowest setting value (for example, "1") among the plurality of set values. In this case, the player's willingness to play is reduced, and there is room for improvement. Therefore, the invention according to the means B1 to B4 can change the set value set in the setting change mode with respect to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-199931, and the effect control means. Is different in that when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, the setting change suggestion suggesting that the setting value is changed during the execution of the customer waiting effect can be executed. This makes it possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine capable of improving the motivation for playing (playing an action effect).

<Means C>
The invention according to means C1 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) provided with a gaming control means (gaming control microcomputer 101) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (“1” to “6”) having different jackpot determination probabilities.
The game control means is
Based on the power-on and the input of the predetermined transition signal (setting key cylinder signal, RAM clear switch signal), it is possible to shift to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed (see FIG. 26).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the input timing of the transition signal can be delayed from the timing of turning on the power (see FIG. 37).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the input timing of the transition signal for shifting to the setting change mode may be delayed from the timing of turning on the power. This makes it difficult for the fraudster to know when the transition signal is input. As a result, it is possible to make the game control means input an illegal signal similar to the transition signal at the timing of turning on the power, and to make it difficult to perform an illegal act such as illegally shifting to the setting change mode.

The invention according to the means C2 is
In the gaming machine described in means C1,
The game control means is
When the input timing of the transition signal is set to a predetermined first input timing (for example, 500 ms after the power-on timing according to the input timing pattern A), and a second input timing different from the first input timing (for example, an input timing pattern). It is a gaming machine characterized in that it may be set to 1000 ms after the timing of turning on the power depending on B).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the input timing of the transition signal may be the first input timing or the second input timing. That is, the input timing of the transition signal is not fixed. Therefore, it becomes more difficult for the fraudster to grasp when the input timing of the transition signal is, and it is possible to make it more difficult to commit the fraudulent act.

The invention according to the means C3 is
In the gaming machine according to means C1 or means C2.
A storage means (game RAM 104) that can store information related to the game, and
A RAM clear operation means (RAM clear switch 191) capable of erasing information related to a game stored in the storage means based on the operation, and
A transition operation means (setting key cylinder 180) capable of transitioning to the setting change mode based on the operation from a predetermined initial position (standby position) to a movement position (rotation position) is provided.
The transition signal includes a RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch signal) based on an operation to the RAM clear operation means and a transition operation signal (setting key cylinder signal) based on an operation to the transition operation means.
The game control means can make the input timing of the RAM clear signal different from the input timing of the transition operation signal (input timing pattern E, input timing pattern F, input shown in FIG. 37 (A)). It is a gaming machine characterized by timing pattern G and input timing pattern H).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the gaming control means makes the input timing of the RAM clear signal input after the power-on timing different from the input timing of the transition operation signal input after the power-on timing. .. This makes it difficult for the fraudster to grasp both the timing of the RAM clear signal input timing for shifting to the setting change mode and the timing of the transition operation signal input timing for shifting to the setting change mode. It is possible to make cheating more difficult.

The invention according to the means C4 is
In the gaming machine described in means C1,
A storage means (game RAM 104) that can store information related to the game, and
A RAM clear operation means (RAM clear switch 191) capable of erasing information related to a game stored in the storage means based on the operation, and
A transition operation means (setting key cylinder 180) capable of transitioning to the setting change mode based on the operation from a predetermined initial position (standby position) to a movement position (rotation position) is provided.
The transition signal includes a RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch signal) based on an operation to the RAM clear operation means and a transition operation signal (setting key cylinder signal) based on an operation to the transition operation means.
The game control means is
When the input timing of the RAM clear signal and the input timing of the transition operation signal are the same (input timing pattern A, input timing pattern B, input timing pattern C, input timing pattern D shown in FIG. 37 (A)). When the input timing of the RAM clear signal and the input timing of the transition operation signal are different (input timing pattern E, input timing pattern F, input timing pattern G, input timing pattern H shown in FIG. 37 (A)). It is a game machine characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the gaming control means has the case where the input timing of the RAM clear signal and the input timing of the transition operation signal are the same after the timing of turning on the power, and the input timing of the RAM clear signal. And the input timing of the transition operation signal may be different. As a result, it becomes more difficult for the fraudster to grasp at what timing the input timing of the RAM clear signal and the input timing of the transition operation signal are performed, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act more difficult to perform. be.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-199931, the jackpot determination probability can be set to any one of a plurality of set values different from each other. By the way, when the setting value is changed, the setting is changed based on the fact that the power is turned on and a predetermined transition signal (setting key cylinder switch signal, RAM clear switch signal) is input to the game control means. You need to switch to mode. Here, it is generally considered that the game control means inputs a transition signal at the same time as the timing of turning on the power. However, in this case, the fraudster can easily grasp the input timing of the transition signal. For example, at the timing of turning on the power, the fraudulent signal similar to the transition signal is input to the game control means, and the setting change mode is set. There is a risk of fraudulent activity that may lead to fraudulent migration. Therefore, the invention according to the means C1 to C4 sets a set value for the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-199931 based on the power-on and the input of a predetermined transition signal. The difference is that it is possible to shift to the changeable setting change mode, and the input timing of the shift signal can be delayed from the timing of turning on the power. This makes it possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine capable of making it difficult to perform fraudulent acts (effectively exerting an action effect).

PY1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 50 ... Image display device 50a ... Display screen 101 ... Game control microcomputer 121 ... Production control microcomputer 620 ... Speaker

Claims (2)

A game control means that can set a set value corresponding to the jackpot judgment probability,
In a gaming machine equipped with an operable operating means
The game control means is
A transition signal can be input based on the operation to the operating means.
Based on turning on the power and inputting the transition signal, it is possible to shift to the setting mode related to the set value .
A gaming machine characterized in that the transition signal can be input at a timing determined by a lottery . A game control means that can set a set value corresponding to the jackpot judgment probability,
A storage means that can store information related to the game,
A RAM clear operation means capable of erasing information related to a game stored in the storage means based on the operation, and a RAM clear operation means.
Equipped with a transition operation means that can be operated from a predetermined initial position to a movement position,
The game control means is
A RAM clear signal can be input based on the operation to the RAM clear operation means.
It is possible to input a transition operation signal based on the fact that the transition operation means is operated to the movement position.
It is possible to shift to the setting change mode based on the power-on, the input of the RAM clear signal , and the input of the transition operation signal.
When the RAM clear operation means is operated at the time of turning on the power and the transition operation means is operated at the movement position, the RAM clear signal and the transition operation signal are input at the same timing, and the above. A gaming machine characterized in that there are times when a RAM clear signal and the transition operation signal are input at different timings .

Images